CNL-17-123, Supplement to Application to Revise Technical Specifications to Adopt TSTF-547, Revision 1, Clarification of Rod Position Requirements (WBN-TS-16-025)

From kanterella
Jump to navigation Jump to search

Supplement to Application to Revise Technical Specifications to Adopt TSTF-547, Revision 1, Clarification of Rod Position Requirements (WBN-TS-16-025)
ML17272A955
Person / Time
Site: Watts Bar  Tennessee Valley Authority icon.png
Issue date: 09/29/2017
From: James Shea
Tennessee Valley Authority
To:
Document Control Desk, Office of Nuclear Reactor Regulation
References
CNL-17-123, TSTF-547, Rev 1, WBN-TS-16-025
Download: ML17272A955 (196)


Text

Tennessee Valley Authority, 1101 Market Street, Chattanooga, Tennessee 37402 CNL-17-123 September 29, 2017 10 CFR 50.90 ATTN: Document Control Desk U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission Washington, D.C. 20555-0001 Watts Bar Nuclear Plant, Unit 1 Facility Operating License No. NPF-90 NRC Docket No. 50-390 Watts Bar Nuclear Plant, Unit 2 Facility Operating License No. NPF-96 NRC Docket No. 50-391

Subject:

Supplement to Application to Revise Technical Specifications to Adopt TSTF-547, Revision 1, Clarification of Rod Position Requirements (WBN-TS-16-025)

References:

1. TVA letter to NRC, CNL-16-148, Application to Revise Technical Specifications to Adopt TSTF-547, Revision 1, Clarification of Rod Position Requirements (WBN-TS-16-025), dated November 23, 2016 (ML16335A179)
2. Technical Specification Task Force (TSTF) letter to NRC, TSTF Comments on Draft Model Safety Evaluation of Traveler TSTF-547, Revision 0, Clarification of Rod Position Requirements, and Transmittal of TSTF-547, Revision 1, dated December 31, 2015 (ML15365A610)
3. NRC letter to TSTF, Final Safety Evaluation of Technical Specifications Task Force Traveler TSTF-547, Revision 1, Clarification of Rod Positon Requirements (TAC No. MF3570), dated March 4, 2016 (ML16012A130 and ML15328A350)

In Reference 1, the Tennessee Valley Authority (TVA) submitted a request for an amendment to the Technical Specifications (TS) for the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant (WBN),

Units 1 and 2. The proposed amendment revises the requirements on control and shutdown rods, and rod and bank position indication in accordance with Technical Specification Task Force (TSTF)-547, Revision 1, Clarification of Rod Position Requirements (Reference 2).

U. S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission CNL-17-123 Page 2 September 29, 2017 The proposed changes to the TS pages for WBN Units 1 and 2 submitted in Reference 1 revised, in part, Condition A of TS 3.1.6, Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits, and TS 3.1.7, Control Bank Inserted Limits to add the phrase inserted 16 steps.

As noted in Reference 2 and the NRC Safety Evaluation (Reference 3), the number 16 was bracketed and it was to be replaced with the plant-specific minimum number of steps that the rods must be moved to perform SR 3.1.4.2. As noted in Reference 1, TS 3.1.4 in TSTF-547, Revision 1 corresponds to WBN Units 1 and 2 TS 3.1.5. Correspondingly, WBN Units 1 and 2 SR 3.1.5.2 states Verify rod freedom of movement (trippability) by moving each rod not fully inserted in the core 10 steps in either direction.

Therefore, for consistency with WBN Units 1 and 2 SR 3.1.5.2, the proposed changes to Condition A of WBN Units 1 and 2 TS 3.1.6 and 3.1.7, should have stated inserted 10 steps. As noted in the Bases for WBN Units 1 and 2 SR 3.1.5.2, Moving each control rod by 10 steps will not cause radial or axial power tilts, or oscillations, to occur. The number of steps in WBN Units 1 and 2 SR 3.1.5.2 is also consistent with SR 3.1.4.2 in NUREG-1431, Revision 4, Standard Technical Specifications Westinghouse Plants. TVA has entered this error into our corrective action program.

This supplement does not affect the evaluation provided in Attachment 1 to Reference 1.

This supplement only affects the proposed changes to the WBN Units 1 and 2 TS and Bases provided in Attachments 2 through 7 of Reference 1. For completeness, this supplement contains all of the proposed changes to the WBN Units 1 and 2 TS and Bases.

Enclosures 1 and 2 provide the existing respective WBN Units 1 and 2 TS pages marked up to show the proposed changes. Enclosures 3 and 4 provide the existing respective WBN Units 1 and 2 TS pages retyped to show the proposed changes. Enclosures 5 and 6 provide the existing respective WBN Units 1 and 2 TS Bases pages marked to show the proposed changes for information only. Enclosures 7 and 8 provide the existing respective WBN Units 1 and 2 TS Bases pages retyped to show the proposed changes. Enclosures 1 through 6 supersede the TS and Bases changes provided in Attachments 2 through 7 of Reference 1. The retyped WBN Units 1 and 2 TS Bases pages (Enclosures 7 and 8, respectively) were not provided in Reference 1.

The WBN Plant Operations Review Committee and the TVA Nuclear Safety Review Board have reviewed this proposed change and determined that operation of WBN Units 1 and 2 in accordance with the proposed change will not endanger the health and safety of the public.

This response does not change the no significant hazards considerations determination contained in Reference 1. There are no new regulatory commitments associated with this submittal. Please address any questions regarding this request to Edward D. Schrull at (423) 751-3850.

U. S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission CNL-17-123 Page 3 September 29, 2017 I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct. Executed on this 29th day of September 2017 .

Respectfully,

~-~~

J. W. Shea Vice President, Nuclear Regulatory Affairs and Support Services

Enclosures:

1. Proposed Technical Specification Changes (Mark-Up) for WBN Unit 1
2. Proposed Technical Specification Changes (Mark-Up) for WBN Unit 2
3. Revised Technical Specification Pages (Final Typed) for WBN Unit 1
4. Revised Technical Specification Pages (Final Typed) for WBN Unit 2
5. Proposed Technical Specification Bases Changes (Mark-Up) for WBN Unit 1 (For Information Only)
6. Proposed Technical Specification Bases Changes (Mark-Up) for WBN Unit 2 (For Information Only)
7. Proposed Technical Specification Bases Changes (Final Typed) for WBN Unit 1 (For Information Only)
8. Proposed Technical Specification Bases Changes (Final Typed) for WBN Unit 2 (For Information Only) cc (Enclosures):

NRC Regional Administrator - Region II NRC Senior Resident Inspector - Watts Bar Nuclear Plant NRC Project Manager - Watts Bar Nuclear Plant Director, Division of Radiological Health - Tennessee State Department of Environment and Conservation (w/o attachments)

Enclosure 1 Proposed Technical Specification Changes (Mark-Up) for WBN Unit 1 CNL-17-123

Rod Group Alignment Limits 3.1.5 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 3.1.5 Rod Group Alignment Limits LCO 3.1.5 All shutdown and control rods shall be OPERABLE., with all individual indicated rod positions within 12 steps of their group step counter demand position.

AND Individual indicated rod positions shall be within 12 steps of their group step counter demand position.

APPLICABILITY: MODES 1 and 2.

ACTIONS CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME A. One or more rod(s) A.1.1 Verify SDM is 1.6% k/kto 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> untrippableinoperable. be within the limits specified in the COLR.

OR 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> A.1.2 Initiate boration to restore SDM to within limit.

AND 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> A.2 Be in MODE 3.

B. One rod not within alignment limits. B.1 Restore rod to within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> alignment limits.

OR B.2.1.1B.1.1 Verify SDM is 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> 1.6% k/kto be within the limits specified in the COLR.

OR 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> B.2.1.2B.1.2 Initiate boration to restore SDM to within limit.

(continued)

AND Watts Bar-Unit 1 3.1-8 Amendment No. XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits 3.1.5 ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME B. (continued) B.2.2 Reduce THERMAL POWER to 75% RTP. 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> AND B.2.3 Verify SDM is 1.6% k/kwithin the limits Once per specified in the COLR. 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> AND B.2.4 Perform SR 3.2.1.1, SR 3.2.1.2, and SR 3.2.2.1. 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> AND B.2.5 Perform SR 3.2.2.1. 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> AND B.2.65 Re-evaluate safety 5 days analyses and confirm results remain valid for duration of operation under these conditions.

C. Required Action and C.1 Be in MODE 3. 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> associated Completion Time of Condition B not met.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 3.1-9 Amendment No. XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits 3.1.5 ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME D. More than one rod not within D.1.1 Verify SDM is 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> alignment limit. 1.6% k/kwithin the limits specified in the COLR.

OR 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> D.1.2 Initiate boration to restore required SDM to within limit.

AND 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> D.2 Be in MODE 3.

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY SR 3.1.5.1 -------------------------------- NOTES ---------------------------------

1. Not required to be performed for rods associated with inoperable rod position indicator or demand position indicator
2. Not required to be performed until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after associated rod motion Verify position of individual rods positions within alignment 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> limit.

AND Once within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> and every 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> thereafter when the rod position deviation monitor is inoperable SR 3.1.5.2 Verify rod freedom of movement (trippability) by moving 92 days each rod not fully inserted in the core 10 steps in either direction.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 3.1-10 Amendment No. XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits 3.1.5 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY SR 3.1.5.3 Verify rod drop time of each rod, from the fully withdrawn Prior to reactor position, is 2.7 seconds from the beginning of decay of criticality afterinitial stationary gripper coil voltage to dashpot entry, with: fuel loading and each removal of the

a. Tavg 551°F; and reactor head
b. All reactor coolant pumps operating.

Watts Bar-Unit 1 3.1-11 Amendment No. XX

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits 3.1.6 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 3.1.6 Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits LCO 3.1.6 Each shutdown bank shall be within insertion limits specified in the COLR.


NOTE ---------------------------------------------------

Not applicable to shutdown banks inserted while performing SR 3.1.5.2.

APPLICABILITY: MODES 1 and, 2 MODE 2 with any control bank not fully inserted.

ACTIONS CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME A. One or more shutdown A.1 Verify all control banks are 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> banks not within within the insertion limits limitsinserted 10 steps specified in the COLR.

beyond the insertion limits specified in the COLR. AND A.12.1 Verify SDM is 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> 1.6% k/kwithin the limits specified in the COLR.

OR 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> A.12.2 Initiate boration to restore SDM to within limit.

AND 2 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> A.23 Restore shutdown banks to within limitsthe insertion limits specified in the COLR.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 3.1-12 Amendment No. XX

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits 3.1.6 ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME B. One or more shutdown B.1.1 Verify SDM is within the 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> banks not within limits for limits specified in the COLR.

reasons other than Condition A. OR B.1.2 Initiate boration to restore 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> SDM to within limit.

AND B.2 Restore shutdown banks to 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> within limits.

BC. Required Action and BC.1 Be in MODE 3. 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> associated Completion Time not met.

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY


NOTE ------------------------------------

Not required to be performed until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after associated rod motion.

SR 3.1.6.1 Verify each shutdown bank is within the insertion limits 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> specified in the COLR.

Watts Bar-Unit 1 3.1-13 Amendment No. XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits 3.1.7 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 3.1.7 Control Bank Insertion Limits LCO 3.1.7 Control banks shall be within the insertion, sequence, and overlap limits specified in the COLR.


NOTE------------------------------------------------

Not applicable to control banks inserted while performing SR 3.1.5.2.

APPLICABILITY: MODE 1, MODE 2 with keff 1.0.


NOTE------------------------------------------------

This LCO is not applicable while performing SR 3.1.5.2.

ACTIONS CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME A. Control bank A, B, or C A.1 Verify all shutdown 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> inserted 10 steps beyond banks are within the the insertion, sequence, or insertion limits specified overlap limits specified in the in the COLR.

COLR.

AND A.2.1 Verify SDM is within the 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> limits specified in the COLR.

OR A.2.2 Initiate boration to 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> restore SDM to within limits.

AND A.3 Restore the control bank 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> to within the insertion, sequence, and overlap limits specified in the COLR.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 3.1-14 Amendment No. XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits 3.1.7 ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME AB. Control bank insertion limits AB.1.1 Verify SDM is 1.6% k/k 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> not met for reasons other than within the limits specified in Condition A. the COLR.

OR AB.1.2 Initiate boration to restore 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> SDM to within limit.

AND AB.2 Restore control bank(s) to 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> within limits.

BC. Control bank sequence or BC.1.1 Verify SDM is 1.6% 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> overlap limits not met for k/kwithin the limits reasons other than specified in the COLR.

Condition A.

OR BC.1.2 Initiate boration to restore 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> SDM to within limit.

AND BC.2 Restore control bank 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> sequence and overlap to within limits.

CD. Required Action and CD.1 Be in MODE 32 with keff < 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> associated Completion Time 1.0.

not met.

Watts Bar-Unit 1 3.1-15 Amendment No. XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits 3.1.7 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY SR 3.1.7.1 Verify estimated critical control bank position is within Within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> prior the limits specified in the COLR. to achieving criticality SR 3.1.7.2 --------------------------------- NOTE ------------------------------

Not required to be performed until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after associated rod motion.

Verify each control bank insertion is within the limits 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> specified in the COLR.

AND Once within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> and every 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> thereafter when the rod insertion limit monitor is inoperable SR 3.1.7.3 ---------------------------------- NOTE -----------------------------

Not required to be performed until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after associated rod motion.

Verify sequence and overlap limits specified in the 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> COLR are met for control banks not fully withdrawn from the core.

Watts Bar-Unit 1 3.1-16 Amendment No. XX

Rod Position Indication 3.1.8 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 3.1.8 Rod Position Indication LCO 3.1.8 The Analog Rod Position Indication (ARPI) System and the Demand Position Indication System shall be OPERABLE.


NOTE -----------------------------------------------

Individual RPIs are not required to be OPERABLE for 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> following movement of the associated rods.

APPLICABILITY: MODES 1 and 2.

ACTIONS


NOTE---------------------------------------------------------------------

Separate Condition entry is allowed for each inoperable od position indicator per groupRPI and each demand position indicator per bank.

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME


NOTE------------------- A.1 Verify the position of the rods Once per 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> Rod position monitoring by with inoperable position Required Actions A.2.1 and A.2.2 indicatorsRPI indirectly by using may only be applied to one either the movable incore inoperable ARPI and shall only be detectors or the PDMS.

allowed: (1) until the end of the current cycle, or (2) until an entry OR into MODE 5 of sufficient duration, whichever occurs first, when the A.2.1 Verify the position of the rods 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> repair of the inoperable ARPI can with the inoperable position safely be performed. Required indicatorRPI indirectly by using AND Actions A.2.1, A.2.2 and A.2.3 either the movable incore shall not be allowed after the plant detectors or the PDMS. Once every 31 days has been in MODE 5 or other EFPD thereafter plant condition, for a sufficient period of time, in which the repair AND of the inoperable ARPI could have safely been performed. 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> , if rod


control system A. One ARPI per group parameters inoperable for in one or indicateafter more groups. discovery of each unintended rod AND movement AND (continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 3.1-17 Amendment 58, XX

Rod Position Indication 3.1.8 ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME A. (continued) A.2.2 Review the parameters of the 16 hour1.851852e-4 days <br />0.00444 hours <br />2.645503e-5 weeks <br />6.088e-6 months <br />s8 hours after rod control system for each movement of indications of unintended rod rod with inoperable movement for the rod with an RPI 12 steps inoperable position indicator.

AND AND A.2.3 Verify the position of the rod Prior to THERMAL with an inoperable position indicator by POWER exceeding using either the movable incore 50% RTP detectors or the PDMS.

AND 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> after reaching RTP AND Once per 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> thereafter 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br />, if the rod with an inoperable position indicator is AND moved greater than 12 steps.

A.2.2 Restore inoperable RPI to OPERABLE status. Prior to entering MODE 2 from MODE 3.

AND OR Prior to increasing THERMAL POWER above 50% RTP and A.3 Reduce THERMAL POWER to within 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> of less than or equal to 50% reaching 100% RTP RTP.

8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> (continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 3.1-18 Amendment 58, XX

Rod Position Indication 3.1.8 ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME B. More than one RPI per B.1 Place the control rods under Immediately group inoperable in one or manual control.

more groups.

AND B.2 Restore inoperable RPIs to 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> OPERABLE status such that a maximum of one RPI per group is inoperable.

BC. One or more rods withRPI BC.1 Verify the position of the rods 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> inoperable position indicators with inoperable position havein one or more groups indicatorsRPIs indirectly by and associated rod has been using either the movable moved in excess of 24 steps incore detectors or the PDMS.

in one direction since the last determination of the rod's OR position. 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> BC.2 Reduce THERMAL POWER to less than or equal to 50%

RTP.

CD. One or more demand position CD.1.1 Verify by administrative means Once per 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> indicators per bank inoperable all ARPIs for the affected for in one or more banks. banks are OPERABLE.

AND CD.1.2 Verify the most withdrawn rod Once per 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> and the least withdrawn rod of the affected banks are 12 less than or equal to 12 steps apart.

OR 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> CD.2 Reduce THERMAL POWER to less than or equal to 50% RTP.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 3.1-18a Amendment 58, XX

Rod Position Indication 3.1.8 ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME DE. Required Action and DE.1 Be in MODE 3. 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> associated Completion Time not met.

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY SR 3.1.8.1 --------------------------------- NOTE ---------------------------

Not required to be met for RPIs associated with rods that do not meet LCO 3.1.5.

Verify each ARPI agrees within 12 steps of the group 18 monthsOnce prior demand position for the full indicated range of rod to criticality after travel. each removal of the reactor head.

Watts Bar-Unit 1 3.1-19 Amendment 58, XX

Enclosure 2 Proposed Technical Specification Changes (Mark-Up) for WBN Unit 2 CNL-17-123

Rod Group Alignment Limits 3.1.5 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 3.1.5 Rod Group Alignment Limits LCO 3.1.5 All shutdown and control rods shall be OPERABLE., with all individual indicated rod positions within 12 steps of their group step counter demand position.

AND Individual indicated rod positions shall be within 12 steps of their group step counter demand position.

APPLICABILITY: MODES 1 and 2.

ACTIONS CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME A. One or more rod(s) A.1.1 Verify SDM is 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> untrippableinoperable. 1.6% k/kto be within the limits specified in the COLR.

OR A.1.2 Initiate boration to restore 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> SDM to within limit.

AND A.2 Be in MODE 3. 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> B. One rod not within B.1 Restore rod to within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> alignment limits. alignment limits.

OR 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> Verify SDM is B.2.1.1 1.6% k/kto be within B.1.1 the limits specified in the COLR.

OR OR B.2.1.2 Initiate boration to restore 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> B.1.2 SDM to within limit.

AND (continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 3.1-7 Amendment No. XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits 3.1.5 ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME B. (continued) B.2.2 Reduce THERMAL 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> POWER to 75% RTP.

AND B.2.3 Verify SDM is Once per 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> 1.6% k/kwithin the limits specified in the COLR.

AND B.2.4 Perform SR 3.2.1.1, SR 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> 3.2.1.2, and SR 3.2.2.1.

AND B.2.65 Re-evaluate safety 5 days analyses and confirm results remain valid for duration of operation under these conditions.

C. Required Action and C.1 Be in MODE 3. 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> associated Completion Time of Condition B not met.

D. More than one rod not D.1.1 Verify SDM is 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> within alignment limit. 1.6% k/kwithin the limits specified in the COLR.

OR D.1.2 Initiate boration to restore 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> required SDM to within limit.

AND D.2 Be in MODE 3. 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> Watts Bar - Unit 2 3.1-8 Amendment No. XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits 3.1.5 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY SR 3.1.5.1 ----------------------------- NOTES ------------------------------

1. Not required to be performed for rods associated with inoperable rod position indicator or demand position indicator.
2. Not required to be performed until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after associated rod motion.

Verify position of individual rods positions within 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> alignment limit.

AND Once within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> and every 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> thereafter when the rod position deviation monitor is inoperable SR 3.1.5.2 Verify rod freedom of movement (trippability) by 92 days moving each rod not fully inserted in the core 10 steps in either direction.

SR 3.1.5.3 Verify rod drop time of each rod, from the fully Prior to reactor withdrawn position, is 2.7 seconds from the criticality after initial beginning of decay of stationary gripper coil voltage fuel loading and to dashpot entry, with: each removal of the reactor head

a. Tavg 551°F; and
b. All reactor coolant pumps operating.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 3.1-9 Amendment No. XX

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits 3.1.6 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 3.1.6 Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits LCO 3.1.6 Each shutdown bank shall be within insertion limits specified in the COLR.


NOTE -------------------------------------------

Not applicable to shutdown banks inserted while performing SR 3.1.5.2.

APPLICABILITY: MODES 1 and 2, MODE 2 with any control bank not fully inserted.

ACTIONS CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME A. One or more shutdown A.1 Verify all control banks 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> bank s not within are within the insertion limitsinserted 10 steps limits specified in the beyond the insertion limits COLR.

specified in the COLR.

AND A.12.1 Verify SDM is 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> 1.6% k/kwithin the limits specified in the COLR.

OR A.12.2 Initiate boration to restore 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> SDM to within limit.

AND A.23 Restore shutdown banks 2 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> to within limitsthe insertion limits specified in the COLR.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 3.1-10 Amendment No. XX

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits 3.1.6 ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME B. One or more shutdown B.1.1 Verify SDM is within the 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> banks not within limits for limits specified in the reasons other than COLR.

Condition A.

OR B.1.2 Initiate boration to restore 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> SDM to within limit.

AND B.2 Restore shutdown banks 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> to within limits.

B.C. Required Action and BC.1 Be in MODE 3. 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> associated Completion Time not met.

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY SR 3.1.6.1 -------------------------------- NOTE -----------------------------

Not required to be performed until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after associated rod motion.

Verify each shutdown bank is within the insertion 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> limits specified in the COLR Watts Bar - Unit 2 3.1-11 Amendment No. XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits 3.1.7 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 3.1.7 Control Bank Insertion Limits LCO 3.1.7 Control banks shall be within the insertion, sequence, and overlap limits specified in the COLR


NOTE -----------------------------------------------

Not applicable to control banks inserted while performing SR 3.1.5.2.

APPLICABILITY: MODE 1, MODE 2 with keff 1.0.


NOTE--------------------------------------------

This LCO is not applicable while performing SR 3.1.5.2.

ACTIONS CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME A. Control bank A, B, or C A.1 Verify all shutdown banks 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> inserted 10 steps beyond are within the insertion the insertion, sequence, or limits specified in the overlap limits specified in COLR.

the COLR.

AND A.2.1 Verify SDM is within the 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> limits specified in the COLR.

OR A.2.2 Initiate boration to restore 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> SDM to within limits.

AND (continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 3.1-12 Amendment No. XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits 3.1.7 ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME A. (continued) A.3 Restore the control bank 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> to within the insertion, sequence, and overlap limits specified in the COLR.

A. B. Control bank insertion limits not met for reasons AB.1.1 Verify SDM is 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> other than Condition A. 1.6% k/kwithin the limits specified in the COLR.

OR AB.1.2 Initiate boration to restore 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> SDM to within limit.

AND AB.2 Restore control bank(s) to 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> within limits.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 3.1-13 Amendment No. XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits 3.1.7 ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME B. C. Control bank sequence or overlap limits not met for BC.1.1 Verify SDM 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> reasons other than is 1.6% k/kwithin the Condition A. limits specified in the COLR.

OR BC.1.2 Initiate boration to restore 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> SDM to within limit.

AND BC.2 Restore control bank 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> sequence and overlap to within limits.

C. D. Required Action and associated Completion Time CD.1 Be in MODE 32 with 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> not met keff < 1.0.

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY SR 3.1.7.1 Verify estimated critical control bank position is within Within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> prior the limits specified in the COLR. to achieving criticality (continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 3.1-14 Amendment No. XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits 3.1.7 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY SR 3.1.7.2 -------------------------------- NOTE -----------------------------

Not required to be performed until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after associated rod motion.

Verify each control bank insertion is within the limits 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> specified in the COLR.

AND Once within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> and every 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> thereafter when the rod insertion limit monitor is inoperable SR 3.1.7.3 -------------------------------- NOTE -----------------------------

Not required to be performed until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after associated rod motion.

Verify sequence and overlap limits specified in the 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> COLR are met for control banks not fully withdrawn from the core.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 3.1-1514a Amendment No. XX

Rod Position Indication 3.1.8 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 3.1.8 Rod Position Indication LCO 3.1.8 The Rod Position Indication (RPI) System and the Demand Position Indication System shall be OPERABLE.


NOTE ---------------------------------------------

Individual RPIs are not required to be OPERABLE for 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> following movement of the associated rods.

APPLICABILITY: MODES 1 and 2.

ACTIONS


NOTE------------------------------------------------------------

Separate Condition entry is allowed for each inoperable rod position indicatorRPI per group and each demand position indicator per bank.

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME A. One RPI per group A.1 Verify the position of the Once per 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> inoperable in one or more rods with inoperable groups.----------------NOTE--- position indicatorsRPI


indirectly by using the Rod position monitoring by PDMS.

Required Actions A.2.1 and A.2.2 may only be applied to OR one inoperable RPI and shall only be allowed: (1) until the A.2.1 Verify the position of the 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> end of the current cycle, or rods with the inoperable (2) until an entry into MODE 5 position indicatorRPI AND of sufficient duration, whichever indirectly by using the occurs first, when the repair of PDMS. Once every 31 days the inoperable RPI can safely EFPD thereafter be performed. Required AND Actions A.2.1, A.2.2 and A.2.3 shall not be allowed after the 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br />, if rod control plant has been in MODE 5 or system parameters other plant condition, for a indicate after sufficient period of time, in discovery of each which the repair of the unintended rod inoperable RPI could have movement safely been performed.

AND (continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 3.1-15 Amendment XX

Rod Position Indication 3.1.8 ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME A. (continued) 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> after each movement of rod with inoperable RPI 12 steps AND Prior to THERMAL POWER exceeding 50% RTP AND 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> after reaching RTP AND A.2.2 Restore inoperable RPI to Prior to entering OPERABLE status. MODE 2 from MODE 3 OR A.3 Reduce THERMAL 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> POWER to 50% RTP B. More than one RPI per B.1 Place the control rods Immediately group inoperable in one or under manual control.

more groups.

AND B.2 Restore inoperable RPIs 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> to OPERABLE status such that a maximum of one RPI per group is inoperable.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 3.1-16 Amendment XX

Rod Position Indication 3.1.8 ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME A. C. One or more rods BC.1 Verify the position of the 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> withRPI inoperable position rods with inoperable indicators havein one or position indicatorsRPIs more groups and indirectly by using the associated rod has been PDMS.

moved in excess of 24 steps in one direction OR since the last determination of the rod's position. BC.2 Reduce THERMAL 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> POWER to less than or equal to 50% RTP.

B. D. One or more demand CD.1.1 Verify by administrative Once per 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> position indicators per bank means all RPIs for the inoperable for in one or affected banks are more banks. OPERABLE.

AND CD.1.2 Verify the most withdrawn Once per 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> rod and the least withdrawn rod of the affected banks are 12 less than or equal to 12 steps apart.

OR CD.2 Reduce THERMAL 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> POWER to less than or equal to 50% RTP.

C. E. Required Action and DE.1 Be in MODE 3. 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> associated Completion Time not met.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 3.1-17 Amendment XX

Rod Position Indication 3.1.8 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY SR 3.1.8.1 -------------------------------- NOTE -----------------------------

Not required to be met for RPIs associated with rods that do not meet LCO 3.1.5.

Verify each RPI agrees within 12 steps of the group 18 monthsOnce demand position for the full indicated range of rod prior to criticality travel. after each removal of the reactor head Watts Bar - Unit 2 3.1-17a Amendment XX

Enclosure 3 Revised Technical Specification Pages (Final Typed) for WBN Unit 1 CNL-17-123

Rod Group Alignment Limits 3.1.5 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 3.1.5 Rod Group Alignment Limits LCO 3.1.5 All shutdown and control rods shall be OPERABLE.

AND Individual indicated rod positions shall be within 12 steps of their group step counter demand position.

APPLICABILITY: MODES 1 and 2.

ACTIONS CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME A. One or more rod(s) inoperable. A.1.1 Verify SDM to be within the 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> limits specified in the COLR.

OR A.1.2 Initiate boration to restore 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> SDM to within limit.

AND A.2 Be in MODE 3. 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> B. One rod not within alignment limits. B.1.1 Verify SDM to be within the 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> limits specified in the COLR.

OR B.1.2 Initiate boration to restore 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> SDM to within limit.

AND (continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 3.1-8 Amendment No. XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits 3.1.5 ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME B. (continued) B.2 Reduce THERMAL 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> POWER to 75% RTP.

AND B.3 Verify SDM is within the Once per limits specified in the 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> COLR.

AND B.4 Perform SR 3.2.1.1, SR 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> 3.2.1.2, and SR 3.2.2.1.

AND B.5 Re-evaluate safety 5 days analyses and confirm results remain valid for duration of operation under these conditions.

C. Required Action and C.1 Be in MODE 3. 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> associated Completion Time of Condition B not met.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 3.1-9 Amendment No. XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits 3.1.5 ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME D. More than one rod not within D.1.1 Verify SDM is within the limits 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> alignment limit. specified in the COLR.

OR D.1.2 Initiate boration to restore 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> required SDM to within limit.

AND D.2 Be in MODE 3. 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY SR 3.1.5.1 -------------------------------- NOTES ---------------------------------

1. Not required to be performed for rods associated with inoperable rod position indicator or demand position indicator
2. Not required to be performed until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after associated rod motion Verify position of individual rods within alignment limit. 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> AND Once within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> and every 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> thereafter when the rod position deviation monitor is inoperable SR 3.1.5.2 Verify rod freedom of movement (trippability) by moving 92 days each rod not fully inserted in the core 10 steps in either direction.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 3.1-10 Amendment No. XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits 3.1.5 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY SR 3.1.5.3 Verify rod drop time of each rod, from the fully withdrawn Prior to criticality position, is 2.7 seconds from the beginning of decay of after each removal of stationary gripper coil voltage to dashpot entry, with: the reactor head

a. Tavg 551°F; and
b. All reactor coolant pumps operating.

Watts Bar-Unit 1 3.1-11 Amendment No. XX

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits 3.1.6 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 3.1.6 Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits LCO 3.1.6 Each shutdown bank shall be within insertion limits specified in the COLR.


NOTE ---------------------------------------------------

Not applicable to shutdown banks inserted while performing SR 3.1.5.2.

APPLICABILITY: MODES 1 and 2 ACTIONS CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME A. One shutdown bank A.1 Verify all control banks are 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> inserted 10 steps beyond within the insertion limits the insertion limits specified specified in the COLR.

in the COLR.

AND A.2.1 Verify SDM is within the limits 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> specified in the COLR.

OR A.2.2 Initiate boration to restore SDM 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> to within limit.

AND A.3 Restore shutdown bank to 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> within the insertion limits specified in the COLR.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 3.1-12 Amendment No. XX

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits 3.1.6 ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME B. One or more shutdown B.1.1 Verify SDM is within the 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> banks not within limits for limits specified in the COLR.

reasons other than Condition A. OR B.1.2 Initiate boration to restore 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> SDM to within limit.

AND B.2 Restore shutdown banks to 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> within limits.

C. Required Action and C.1 Be in MODE 3. 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> associated Completion Time not met.

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY


NOTE ------------------------------------

Not required to be performed until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after associated rod motion.

SR 3.1.6.1 Verify each shutdown bank is within the insertion limits 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> specified in the COLR.

Watts Bar-Unit 1 3.1-13 Amendment No. XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits 3.1.7 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 3.1.7 Control Bank Insertion Limits LCO 3.1.7 Control banks shall be within the insertion, sequence, and overlap limits specified in the COLR.


NOTE------------------------------------------------

Not applicable to control banks inserted while performing SR 3.1.5.2.

APPLICABILITY: MODE 1, MODE 2 with keff 1.0.

ACTIONS CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME A. Control bank A, B, or C A.1 Verify all shutdown 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> inserted 10 steps beyond banks are within the the insertion, sequence, or insertion limits specified overlap limits specified in the in the COLR.

COLR.

AND A.2.1 Verify SDM is within the 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> limits specified in the COLR.

OR A.2.2 Initiate boration to 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> restore SDM to within limits.

AND A.3 Restore the control bank 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> to within the insertion, sequence, and overlap limits specified in the COLR.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 3.1-14 Amendment No. XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits 3.1.7 ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME B. Control bank insertion limits B.1.1 Verify SDM is within the 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> not met for reasons other than limits specified in the Condition A. COLR.

OR B.1.2 Initiate boration to restore 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> SDM to within limit.

AND B.2 Restore control bank(s) to 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> within limits.

C. Control bank sequence or C.1.1 Verify SDM is within the 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> overlap limits not met for limits specified in the reasons other than COLR.

Condition A.

OR C.1.2 Initiate boration to restore 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> SDM to within limit.

AND C.2 Restore control bank 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> sequence and overlap to within limits.

D. Required Action and D.1 Be in MODE 2 with keff < 1.0. 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> associated Completion Time not met.

Watts Bar-Unit 1 3.1-15 Amendment No. XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits 3.1.7 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY SR 3.1.7.1 Verify estimated critical control bank position is within Within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> prior the limits specified in the COLR. to achieving criticality SR 3.1.7.2 --------------------------------- NOTE ------------------------------

Not required to be performed until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after associated rod motion.

Verify each control bank insertion is within the limits 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> specified in the COLR.

AND Once within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> and every 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> thereafter when the rod insertion limit monitor is inoperable SR 3.1.7.3 ---------------------------------- NOTE -----------------------------

Not required to be performed until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after associated rod motion.

Verify sequence and overlap limits specified in the 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> COLR are met for control banks not fully withdrawn from the core.

Watts Bar-Unit 1 3.1-16 Amendment No. XX

Rod Position Indication 3.1.8 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 3.1.8 Rod Position Indication LCO 3.1.8 The Rod Position Indication (RPI) System and the Demand Position Indication System shall be OPERABLE.


NOTE -----------------------------------------------

Individual RPIs are not required to be OPERABLE for 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> following movement of the associated rods.

APPLICABILITY: MODES 1 and 2.

ACTIONS


NOTE---------------------------------------------------------------------

Separate Condition entry is allowed for each inoperable RPI and each demand position indicator.

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME A. One RPI per group A.1 Verify the position of the rods Once per 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> inoperable in one or more with inoperable RPI indirectly by groups. using either the movable incore detectors or the PDMS.

OR A.2.1 Verify the position of the rods 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> with the inoperable RPI indirectly by using either the movable AND incore detectors or the PDMS.

Once every 31 EFPD thereafter AND 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> after discovery of each unintended rod movement AND (continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 3.1-17 Amendment 58, XX

Rod Position Indication 3.1.8 ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME A. (continued) 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> after each movement of rod with inoperable RPI 12 steps AND Prior to THERMAL POWER exceeding 50% RTP AND 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> after reaching RTP AND A.2.2 Restore inoperable RPI to Prior to entering OPERABLE status. MODE 2 from MODE 3.

OR 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> A.3 Reduce THERMAL POWER to 50% RTP.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 3.1-18 Amendment 58, XX

Rod Position Indication 3.1.8 ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME B. More than one RPI per B.1 Place the control rods under Immediately group inoperable in one or manual control.

more groups.

AND B.2 Restore inoperable RPIs to 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> OPERABLE status such that a maximum of one RPI per group is inoperable.

C. One or more RPI inoperable C.1 Verify the position of the rods 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> in one or more groups and with inoperable RPIs indirectly associated rod has been by using either the movable moved 24 steps in one incore detectors or the PDMS.

direction since the last determination of the rod's OR position.

C.2 Reduce THERMAL POWER to 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> 50% RTP.

D. One or more demand position D.1.1 Verify by administrative means Once per 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> indicators per bank inoperable all RPIs for the affected banks in one or more banks. are OPERABLE.

AND D.1.2 Verify the most withdrawn rod Once per 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> and the least withdrawn rod of the affected banks are 12 steps apart.

OR D.2 Reduce THERMAL POWER to 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> 50% RTP.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 3.1-18a Amendment 58, XX

Rod Position Indication 3.1.8 ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME E. Required Action and E.1 Be in MODE 3. 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> associated Completion Time not met.

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY SR 3.1.8.1 --------------------------------- NOTE ---------------------------

Not required to be met for RPIs associated with rods that do not meet LCO 3.1.5.

Verify each RPI agrees within 12 steps of the group Once prior to demand position for the full indicated range of rod criticality after each travel. removal of the reactor head.

Watts Bar-Unit 1 3.1-19 Amendment 58, XX

Enclosure 4 Revised Technical Specification Pages (Final Typed) for WBN Unit 2 CNL-17-123

Rod Group Alignment Limits 3.1.5 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 3.1.5 Rod Group Alignment Limits LCO 3.1.5 All shutdown and control rods shall be OPERABLE.

AND Individual indicated rod positions shall be within 12 steps of their group step counter demand position.

APPLICABILITY: MODES 1 and 2.

ACTIONS CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME A. One or more rod(s) A.1.1 Verify SDM to be within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> inoperable. the limits specified in the COLR.

OR A.1.2 Initiate boration to restore 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> SDM to within limit.

AND A.2 Be in MODE 3. 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> B. One rod not within B.1.1 Verify SDM to be within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> alignment limits. the limits specified in the COLR.

OR B.1.2 Initiate boration to restore 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> SDM to within limit.

AND (continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 3.1-7 Amendment No. XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits 3.1.5 ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME B. (continued) B.2 Reduce THERMAL 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> POWER to 75% RTP.

AND B.3 Verify SDM is within the Once per 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> limits specified in the COLR.

AND B.4 Perform SR 3.2.1.1, SR 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> 3.2.1.2, and SR 3.2.2.1.

AND B.5 Re-evaluate safety 5 days analyses and confirm results remain valid for duration of operation under these conditions.

C. Required Action and C.1 Be in MODE 3. 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> associated Completion Time of Condition B not met.

D. More than one rod not D.1.1 Verify SDM is within the 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> within alignment limit. limits specified in the COLR.

OR D.1.2 Initiate boration to restore 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> required SDM to within limit.

AND D.2 Be in MODE 3. 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> Watts Bar - Unit 2 3.1-8 Amendment No. XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits 3.1.5 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY SR 3.1.5.1 ----------------------------- NOTES ------------------------------

1. Not required to be performed for rods associated with inoperable rod position indicator or demand position indicator.
2. Not required to be performed until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after associated rod motion.

Verify position of individual rods within alignment 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> limit.

AND Once within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> and every 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> thereafter when the rod position deviation monitor is inoperable SR 3.1.5.2 Verify rod freedom of movement (trippability) by 92 days moving each rod not fully inserted in the core 10 steps in either direction.

SR 3.1.5.3 Verify rod drop time of each rod, from the fully Prior to criticality withdrawn position, is 2.7 seconds from the after each removal beginning of decay of stationary gripper coil voltage of the reactor head to dashpot entry, with:

a. Tavg 551°F; and
b. All reactor coolant pumps operating.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 3.1-9 Amendment No. XX

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits 3.1.6 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 3.1.6 Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits LCO 3.1.6 Each shutdown bank shall be within insertion limits specified in the COLR.


NOTE -------------------------------------------

Not applicable to shutdown banks inserted while performing SR 3.1.5.2.

APPLICABILITY: MODES 1 and 2 ACTIONS CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME A. One shutdown bank A.1 Verify all control banks 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> inserted 10 steps beyond are within the insertion the insertion limits specified limits specified in the in the COLR. COLR.

AND A.2.1 Verify SDM is within the 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> limits specified in the COLR.

OR A.2.2 Initiate boration to restore 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> SDM to within limit.

AND A.3 Restore shutdown bank 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> to within the insertion limits specified in the COLR.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 3.1-10 Amendment No. XX

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits 3.1.6 ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME B. One or more shutdown B.1.1 Verify SDM is within the 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> banks not within limits for limits specified in the reasons other than COLR.

Condition A.

OR B.1.2 Initiate boration to restore 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> SDM to within limit.

AND B.2 Restore shutdown banks 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> to within limits.

C. Required Action and C.1 Be in MODE 3. 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> associated Completion Time not met.

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY SR 3.1.6.1 -------------------------------- NOTE -----------------------------

Not required to be performed until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after associated rod motion.

Verify each shutdown bank is within the insertion 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> limits specified in the COLR Watts Bar - Unit 2 3.1-11 Amendment No. XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits 3.1.7 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 3.1.7 Control Bank Insertion Limits LCO 3.1.7 Control banks shall be within the insertion, sequence, and overlap limits specified in the COLR


NOTE -----------------------------------------------

Not applicable to control banks inserted while performing SR 3.1.5.2.

APPLICABILITY: MODE 1, MODE 2 with keff 1.0.

ACTIONS CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME A. Control bank A, B, or C A.1 Verify all shutdown banks 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> inserted 10 steps beyond are within the insertion the insertion, sequence, or limits specified in the overlap limits specified in COLR.

the COLR.

AND A.2.1 Verify SDM is within the 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> limits specified in the COLR.

OR A.2.2 Initiate boration to restore 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> SDM to within limits.

AND (continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 3.1-12 Amendment No. XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits 3.1.7 ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME A. (continued) A.3 Restore the control bank 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> to within the insertion, sequence, and overlap limits specified in the COLR.

B. Control bank insertion limits B.1.1 Verify SDM is within the 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> not met for reasons other limits specified in the than Condition A. COLR.

OR B.1.2 Initiate boration to restore 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> SDM to within limit.

AND B.2 Restore control bank(s) to 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> within limits.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 3.1-13 Amendment No. XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits 3.1.7 ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME C. Control bank sequence or C.1.1 Verify SDM is within the 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> overlap limits not met for limits specified in the reasons other than COLR.

Condition A.

OR C.1.2 Initiate boration to restore 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> SDM to within limit.

AND C.2 Restore control bank 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> sequence and overlap to within limits.

D. Required Action and D.1 Be in MODE 2 with 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> associated Completion Time keff < 1.0.

not met.

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY SR 3.1.7.1 Verify estimated critical control bank position is within Within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> prior the limits specified in the COLR. to achieving criticality (continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 3.1-14 Amendment No. XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits 3.1.7 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS (continued)

SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY SR 3.1.7.2 -------------------------------- NOTE -----------------------------

Not required to be performed until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after associated rod motion.

Verify each control bank insertion is within the limits 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> specified in the COLR.

AND Once within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> and every 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> thereafter when the rod insertion limit monitor is inoperable SR 3.1.7.3 -------------------------------- NOTE -----------------------------

Not required to be performed until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after associated rod motion.

Verify sequence and overlap limits specified in the 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> COLR are met for control banks not fully withdrawn from the core.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 3.1-14a Amendment No. XX

Rod Position Indication 3.1.8 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 3.1.8 Rod Position Indication LCO 3.1.8 The Rod Position Indication (RPI) System and the Demand Position Indication System shall be OPERABLE.


NOTE ---------------------------------------------

Individual RPIs are not required to be OPERABLE for 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> following movement of the associated rods.

APPLICABILITY: MODES 1 and 2.

ACTIONS


NOTE------------------------------------------------------------

Separate Condition entry is allowed for each inoperable RPI and each demand position indicator.

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME A. One RPI per group A.1 Verify the position of the Once per 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> inoperable in one or more rods with inoperable RPI groups. indirectly by using the PDMS.

OR A.2.1 Verify the position of the 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> rods with the inoperable RPI indirectly by using AND the PDMS.

Once every 31 EFPD thereafter AND 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> after discovery of each unintended rod movement AND (continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 3.1-15 Amendment XX

Rod Position Indication 3.1.8 ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME A. (continued) 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> after each movement of rod with inoperable RPI 12 steps AND Prior to THERMAL POWER exceeding 50% RTP AND 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> after reaching RTP AND A.2.2 Restore inoperable RPI to Prior to entering OPERABLE status. MODE 2 from MODE 3 OR A.3 Reduce THERMAL 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> POWER to 50% RTP B. More than one RPI per B.1 Place the control rods Immediately group inoperable in one or under manual control.

more groups.

AND B.2 Restore inoperable RPIs 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> to OPERABLE status such that a maximum of one RPI per group is inoperable.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 3.1-16 Amendment XX

Rod Position Indication 3.1.8 ACTIONS (continued)

CONDITION REQUIRED ACTION COMPLETION TIME C. One or more RPI inoperable C.1 Verify the position of the 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> in one or more groups and rods with inoperable RPIs associated rod has been indirectly by using the moved 24 steps in one PDMS.

direction since the last determination of the rod's OR position.

C.2 Reduce THERMAL 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> POWER to 50% RTP.

D. One or more demand D.1.1 Verify by administrative Once per 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> position indicators per bank means all RPIs for the inoperable in one or more affected banks are banks. OPERABLE.

AND D.1.2 Verify the most withdrawn Once per 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> rod and the least withdrawn rod of the affected banks are 12 steps apart.

OR D.2 Reduce THERMAL 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> POWER to 50% RTP.

E. Required Action and E.1 Be in MODE 3. 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> associated Completion Time not met.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 3.1-17 Amendment XX

Rod Position Indication 3.1.8 SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS SURVEILLANCE FREQUENCY SR 3.1.8.1 -------------------------------- NOTE -----------------------------

Not required to be met for RPIs associated with rods that do not meet LCO 3.1.5.

Verify each RPI agrees within 12 steps of the group Once prior to demand position for the full indicated range of rod criticality after each travel. removal of the reactor head Watts Bar - Unit 2 3.1-17a Amendment XX

Enclosure 5 Proposed Technical Specification Bases Changes (Mark-Up) for WBN Unit 1 (For Information Only)

CNL-17-123

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 B 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS B 3.1.5 Rod Group Alignment Limits BASES BACKGROUND The OPERABILITY (ei.ge., trippability) of the shutdown and control rods is an initial assumption in all safety analyses that assume rod insertion upon reactor trip. Maximum rod misalignment is an initial assumption in the safety analysis that directly affects core power distributions and assumptions of available SDM.

The applicable criteria for these reactivity and power distribution design requirements are 10 CFR 50, Appendix A, GDC 10, "Reactor Design," and GDC 26, "Reactivity Control System Redundancy and Capability," (Ref. 1), and 10 CFR 50.46, "Acceptance Criteria for Emergency Core Cooling Systems for Light Water Nuclear Power Reactors" (Ref. 2).

Mechanical or electrical failures may cause a control or shutdown rod to become inoperable or to become misaligned from its group. Control rod Rod inoperability or misalignment may cause increased power peaking, due to the asymmetric reactivity distribution and a reduction in the total available rod worth for reactor shutdown. Therefore, control rod alignment and OPERABILITY are related to core operation in design power peaking limits and the core design requirement of a minimum SDM.

Limits on control rod alignment have been established, and all rod positions are monitored and controlled during power operation to ensure that the power distribution and reactivity limits defined by the design power peaking and SDM limits are preserved.

Rod cluster control assemblies (RCCAs), or rods, are moved by their control rod drive mechanisms (CRDMs). Each CRDM moves its RCCA one step (approximately 5/8 inch) at a time, but at varying rates (steps per minute) depending on the signal output from the Rod Control System.

The RCCAs are divided among control banks and shutdown banks. Each bank may be further subdivided into two groups to provide for precise reactivity control (Shutdown Banks C and D have only one group each). A group consists (continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-24 Revision 51, XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES BACKGROUND of two or more RCCAs that are electrically paralleled to step simultaneously.

(continued) Except for Shutdown Banks C and D, a bank of RCCAs consists of two groups that are moved in a staggered fashion, but always within one step of each other.

There are four control banks and four shutdown banks.

The shutdown banks are maintained either in the fully inserted or fully withdrawn position. The control banks are moved in an overlap pattern, using the following withdrawal sequence: When control bank A reaches a predetermined height in the core, control bank B begins to move out with control bank A. Control bank A stops at the position of maximum withdrawal, and control bank B continues to move out. When control bank B reaches a predetermined height, control bank C begins to move out with control bank B. This sequence continues until control banks A, B, and C are at the fully withdrawn position, and control bank D is approximately halfway withdrawn. The insertion sequence is the opposite of the withdrawal sequence. The control rods are arranged in a radially symmetric pattern, so that control bank motion does not introduce radial asymmetries in the core power distributions.

The axial position of shutdown rods and control rods is indicated by two separate and independent systems, which are the Bank Demand Position Indication System (commonly called group step counters) and the Analog Rod Position Indication (ARPI) System.

The Bank Demand Position Indication System counts the pulses from the rod control system that moves the rods. There is one step counter for each group of rods. Individual rods in a group all receive the same signal to move and should, therefore, all be at the same position indicated by the group step counter for that group. The Bank Demand Position Indication System is considered highly precise (+/- 1 step or +/- 5/8 inch). If a rod does not move one step for each demand pulse, the step counter will still count the pulse and incorrectly reflect the position of the rod.

The ARPI System provides an accurate indication of actual control rod position, but at a lower precision than the step counters. This system is based on inductive analog signals from a series of coils spaced along a hollow tube with a center to center distance of 3.75 inches, which is six steps. The normal (continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-25 Revision 51, XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES BACKGROUND indication accuracy of the ARPI System is +/-+ 6 steps (+/-+ 3.75 inches),

(continued) and the maximum uncertainty is +/-+ 12 steps (+/-+ 7.5 inches). With an indicated deviation of 12 steps between the group step counter and ARPI, the maximum deviation between actual rod position and the demand position could be 24 steps, or 15 inches.

APPLICABLE Control rod misalignment accidents are analyzed in the safety analysis SAFETY ANALYSES (Ref. 3). The acceptance criteria for addressing control rod inoperability or misalignment are that:

a. There be no violations of:
1. specified Specified acceptable fuel design limits, or
2. Reactor Coolant System (RCS) pressure boundary integrity; and
b. The core remains subcritical after accident transients other than a main steam line break (MSLB).

Two types of misalignment are distinguished. During movement of a control rod group, one rod may stop moving, while the other rods in the group continue. This condition may cause excessive power peaking. The second type of misalignment occurs if one rod fails to insert upon a reactor trip and remains stuck fully withdrawn. This condition requires an evaluation to determine that sufficient reactivity worth is held in the control rods to meet the SDM requirement, with the maximum worth rod stuck fully withdrawn.

Three types of analysis are performed in regard to static rod misalignment (Ref. 4). The first type of analysis considers the case where any one rod is completely inserted into the core with all other rods completely withdrawn. With control banks at their insertion limits, the second type of analysis considers the case when any one rod is completely inserted into the core. The third type of analysis considers the case of a completely withdrawn single rod from a bank inserted to its insertion limit. Satisfying limits on departure from nucleate boiling ratio in both of these cases bounds the situation when a rod is misaligned from its group by 12 steps.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-26 Revision XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES APPLICABLE Another type of misalignment occurs if one RCCA fails to insert upon a SAFETY ANALYSES reactor trip in response to a main steam pipe rupture and remains stuck (continued) fully withdrawn. This condition is assumed in the evaluation to determine that the required SDM is met with the maximum worth RCCA also fully withdrawn (Ref. 5). The reactor is shutdown by the boric acid injection delivered by the ECCS.

The Required Actions in this LCO ensure that either deviations from the alignment limits will be corrected or that THERMAL POWER will be adjusted so that excessive local linear heat rates (LHRs) will not occur, and that the requirements on SDM and ejected rod worth are preserved.

Continued operation of the reactor with a misaligned control rod is allowed if the heat flux hot channel factor (FQ(Z)) and the nuclear enthalpy hot channel N

factor(F H) are verified to be within their limits in the COLR and the safety analysis is verified to remain valid. When a control rod is misaligned, the assumptions that are used to determine the rod insertion limits, AFD limits, and quadrant power tilt limits are not preserved. Therefore, the limits may not N

preserve the design peaking factors, and FQ(Z) and F H must be verified directly using incore power distribution measurements. Bases Section 3.2 (Power Distribution Limits) contains more complete discussions of the relation of FQ(Z)

N and F H to the operating limits.

Shutdown and control rod OPERABILITY and alignment are directly related to power distributions and SDM, which are initial conditions assumed in safety analyses. Therefore they satisfy Criterion 2 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii)the NRC Policy Statement.

LCO The limits on shutdown or control rod alignments ensure that the assumptions in the safety analysis will remain valid. The requirements on OPERABILITY ensure that upon reactor trip, the assumed reactivity will be available and will be inserted.

The control rod OPERABILITY requirements (i.e., trippability) also are acceptable from the alignment requirements, which ensure that the RCCAs and banks maintain the correct power distribution and rod alignment. The rod OPERABILITY requirement is satisfied provided the rod will fully insert in the required rod drop time assumed in the safety analysis. Rod control malfunctions that do not result in the inability to move a rod (e.g., rod lift coil failures), but that do not impact trippability, do not result in rod inoperability.

The requirement to maintain the rod alignment to within plus or minus 12 steps is conservative. The minimum misalignment assumed in safety analysis is 24 steps (15 inches), and in some cases a total misalignment from fully withdrawn to fully inserted is assumed.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-27 Revision 104, XX Amendment 82, XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES LCO Failure to meet the requirements of this LCO may produce unacceptable power (continued) peaking factors and LHRs, or unacceptable SDMs, all of which may constitute initial conditions inconsistent with the safety analysis.

APPLICABILITY The requirements on RCCA OPERABILITY and alignment are applicable in MODES 1 and 2 because these are the only MODES in which neutron (or fission) power is generated, and the OPERABILITY (i.e., trippability) and alignment of rods have the potential to affect the safety of the plant. In MODES 3, 4, 5, and 6, the alignment limits do not apply because the control rods are bottomed and the reactor is shut down and not producing fission power. In the shutdown MODES, the OPERABILITY of the shutdown and control rods has the potential to affect the required SDM, but this effect can be compensated for by an increase in the boron concentration of the RCS. See LCO 3.1.1, "SHUTDOWN MARGIN (SDM) - Tavg

> 200°F," for SDM in MODES 3 and 4, LCO 3.1.2, "Shutdown Margin (SDM)-Tavg

< 200°F" for SDM in MODE 5, and LCO 3.9.1, "Boron Concentration," for boron concentration requirements during refueling.

ACTIONS A.1.1 and A.1.2 When one or more rods are untrippableinoperable (i.e., untrippable), there is a possibility that the required SDM may be adversely affected. Under these conditions, it is important to determine the SDM, and if it is less than the required value, initiate boration until the required SDM is recovered. The Completion Time of 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> is adequate for determining SDM and, if necessary, for initiating boration to restore SDM.

In this situation, SDM verification must include the worth of the untrippable rod, as well as a rod of maximum worth.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-28 Revision XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES ACTIONS A.2 (continued)

If the untrippable inoperable rod(s) cannot be restored to OPERABLE status, the plant must be brought to a MODE or condition in which the LCO requirements are not applicable. To achieve this status, the unit must be brought to at least MODE 3 within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />.

The allowed Completion Time is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching MODE 3 from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.

B.1.1 and B.1.2 When a rod becomes misaligned, it can usually be moved and is still trippable. If the rod can be realigned within the Completion Time of 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />, local xenon redistribution during this short interval will not be significant, and operation may proceed without further restriction.

An alternative to realigning a single misaligned RCCA to the group average position is to align the remainder of the group to the position of the misaligned RCCA. However, this must be done without violating the bank sequence, overlap, and insertion limits specified in LCO 3.1.6, "Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits," and LCO 3.1.7, "Control Bank Insertion Limits." The Completion Time of 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> gives the operator sufficient time to adjust the rod positions in an orderly manner.

B.2.1.1 and B.2.1.2 With a misaligned rod, SDM must be verified to be within limit or boration must be initiated to restore SDM to within limit.

In many cases, realigning the remainder of the group to the misaligned rod may not be desirable. For example, realigning control bank B to a rod that is misaligned 15 steps from the top of the core would require a significant power reduction, since control bank D must be moved fully in and control bank C must be moved in to approximately 100 to 115 steps.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-29 Revision XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES ACTIONS B.2.1.1 and B.2.1.2B1.1 and B.1.2 (continued)

Power operation may continue with one RCCA trippable but misaligned, provided that SDM is verified within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />.

The Completion Time of 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> represents the time necessary for determining the actual unit SDM and, if necessary, aligning and starting the necessary systems and components to initiate boration.

B.2.2, B.2.3, B.2.4, and B.2.5, and B.2.6 For continued operation with a misaligned rod, RTP must be reduced, SDM must N

periodically be verified within limits, hot channel factors (FQ(Z) and F H) must be verified within limits, and the safety analyses must be re-evaluated to confirm continued operation is permissible.

Reduction of power to 75% RTP ensures that local LHR increases due to a misaligned RCCA will not cause the core design criteria to be exceeded (Ref. 6).

The Completion Time of 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> gives the operator sufficient time to accomplish an orderly power reduction without challenging the Reactor Protection System.

When a rod is known to be misaligned, there is a potential to impact the SDM.

Since the core conditions can change with time, periodic verification of SDM is required. A Frequency of 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> is sufficient to ensure this requirement continues to be met.

C W N Verifying that FQ(Z), as approximated by F Q(Z) and F Q(Z), and F H are within the required limits ensures that current operation at 75% RTP with a rod misaligned is not resulting in power distributions that may invalidate safety analysis assumptions at full power. The Completion Time of 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> allows sufficient time to obtain an incore power distribution measurement and to N

calculate FQ(Z) and F H.

Once current conditions have been verified acceptable, time is available to perform evaluations of accident analysis to determine that core limits will not be exceeded during a Design Basis Event for the duration of operation under these conditions. The accident analyses presented in UFSAR Chapter 15 (Ref. 3) that may be evaluated to ensure that the analyses remain valid for the duration of continued operation under these conditions. A Completion Time of 5 days is sufficient time to obtain the required input data and to perform the analysis.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-30 Revision XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES ACTIONS C.1 (continued)

When Required Actions cannot be completed within their Completion Time, the unit must be brought to a MODE or Condition in which the LCO requirements are not applicable. To achieve this status, the unit must be brought to at least MODE 3 within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />, which obviates concerns about the development of undesirable xenon or power distributions. The allowed Completion Time of 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching MODE 3 from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging the plant systems.

D.1.1 and D.1.2 More than one control rod becoming misaligned from its group average position is not expected, and has the potential to reduce SDM. Therefore, SDM must be evaluated. One hour allows the operator adequate time to determine SDM.

Restoration of the required SDM, if necessary, requires increasing the RCS boron concentration to provide negative reactivity, as described in the Bases of LCO 3.1.1. The required Completion Time of 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> for initiating boration is reasonable, based on the time required for potential xenon redistribution, the low probability of an accident occurring, and the steps required to complete the action. This allows the operator sufficient time to align the required valves and start the boric acid pumps. Boration will continue until the required SDM is restored.

D.2 If more than one rod is found to be misaligned or becomes misaligned because of bank movement, the unit conditions fall outside of the accident analysis assumptions. Since automatic bank sequencing would continue to cause misalignment, the unit must be brought to a MODE or Condition in which the LCO requirements are not applicable.

To achieve this status, the unit must be brought to at least MODE 3 within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />. The allowed Completion Time is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching MODE 3 from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-31 Revision XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES SURVEILLANCE SR 3.1.5.1 REQUIREMENTS Verification that the position of individual rod positions are is within alignment limits at a Frequency of 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> provides a history that allows the operator to detect a rod that is beginning to deviate from its expected position. If the rod position deviation monitor is inoperable, a Frequency of 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> accomplishes the same goal. The specified Frequency takes into account other rod position information that is continuously available to the operator in the control room, so that during actual rod motion, deviations can immediately be detected.

The SR is modified by a NOTE that permits it to not be performed for rods associated with an inoperable demand position indicator or an inoperable rod position indicator. The alignment limit is based on the demand position indicator which is not available if the indicator is inoperable. LCO 3.1.8, Rod Position Indication, provides Actions to verify the rods are in alignment when one or more rod positon indicators are inoperable.

The Surveillance is modified by a Note which states that the SR is not required to be performed until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after associated rod motion. Control rod temperature affects the accuracy of the rod position indication system. Due to changes in the magnetic permeability of the drive shaft as a function of temperature, the indicated positon is expected to change with time as the drive shaft temperature changes. The one hour period allows control rod temperature to stabilize following rod movement in order to ensure the indicated rod positon is accurate.

SR 3.1.5.2 Verifying each control rod is OPERABLE would require that each rod be tripped.

However, in MODES 1 and 2, tripping each control rod would result in radial or axial power tilts, or oscillations. Exercising each individual control rod every 92 days provides increased confidence that all rods continue to be OPERABLE without exceeding the alignment limit, even if they are not regularly tripped.

Moving each control rod by 10 steps will not cause radial or axial power tilts, or oscillations, to occur. The 92 day Frequency takes into consideration other information available to the operator in the control room and SR 3.1.5.1, which is performed more frequently and adds to the determination of OPERABILITY of the rods. Between required performances of SR 3.1.5.2 (determination of control rod OPERABILITY by movement), if a control rod(s) is discovered to be immovable, but remains trippable and aligned, the control rod(s) is considered to be OPERABLE. At any time, if a control rod(s) is immovable, a determination of the trippability (OPERABILITY) of the control rod(s) must be made, and appropriate action taken.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-32 Revision XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES SURVEILLANCE SR 3.1.5.3 REQUIREMENTS (continued) Verification of rod drop times allows the operator to determine that the maximum rod drop time permitted is consistent with the assumed rod drop time used in the safety analysis. Measuring rod drop times prior to reactor criticality, after initial fuel loading and after each reactor vessel head removal, ensures that the reactor internals and rod drive mechanism will not interfere with rod motion or rod drop time, and that no degradation in these systems has occurred that would adversely affect control rod motion or drop time. This testing is performed with all RCPs operating and the average moderator temperature > 551°F to simulate a reactor trip under actual conditions.

This Surveillance is performed prior to initial criticality and during a plant outage, due to the plant conditions needed to perform the SR and the potential for an unplanned plant transient if the Surveillance were performed with the reactor at power.

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-33 Revision XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES REFERENCES 1. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50, Appendix A, General Design Criterion 10, "Reactor Design," and General Design Criterion 26, "Reactivity Control System Redundancy and Capability."

2. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50.46, "Acceptance Criteria for Emergency Core Cooling Systems for Light Water Nuclear Power Reactors."
3. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.0, "Accident Analyses."
4. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.3, "Rod Cluster Control Assembly Misalignment."
5. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.2, "Major Secondary System Pipe Rupture."
6. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.3.6, "Single Rod Cluster Control Assembly Withdrawal at Full Power."

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-34 Revision XX

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.6 B 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS B 3.1.6 Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits BASES BACKGROUND The insertion limits of the shutdown and control rods are initial assumptions in all safety analyses that assume rod insertion upon reactor trip. The insertion limits directly affect core power and fuel burnup distributions and assumptions of available ejected rod worth, SDM and initial reactivity insertion rate.

The applicable criteria for these reactivity and power distribution design requirements are 10 CFR 50, Appendix A, GDC 10, "Reactor Design," GDC 26, "Reactivity Control System Redundancy and Capability," and GDC 28, "Reactivity Limits" (Ref. 1), and 10 CFR 50.46, "Acceptance Criteria for Emergency Core Cooling Systems for Light Water Nuclear Power Reactors" (Ref. 2). Limits on control rod insertion have been established, and all rod positions are monitored and controlled during power operation to ensure that the power distribution and reactivity limits defined by the design power peaking and SDM limits are preserved.

The rod cluster control assemblies (RCCAs) are divided among control banks and shutdown banks. Each bank may be further subdivided into two groups to provide for precise reactivity control (Shutdown Banks C and D have only one group each). A group consists of two or more RCCAs that are electrically paralleled to step simultaneously. Except for Shutdown Banks C and D, a bank of RCCAs consists of two groups that are moved in a staggered fashion, but always within one step of each other. There are four control banks and four shutdown banks. See LCO 3.1.5, "Rod Group Alignment Limits," for control and shutdown rod OPERABILITY and alignment requirements, and LCO 3.1.8, "Rod Position Indication," for position indication requirements.

The control banks are used for precise reactivity control of the reactor. The positions of the control banks are normally automatically controlled by the Rod Control System, but they can also be manually controlled. They are capable of adding negative reactivity very quickly (compared to borating). The control banks must be maintained above designed insertion limits and are typically near the fully withdrawn position during normal full power operations.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-35 Revision 51, Revision XX

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.6 BASES BACKGROUND Hence, they are not capable of adding a large amount of positive reactivity.

(continued) Boration or dilution of the Reactor Coolant System (RCS) compensates for the reactivity changes associated with large changes in RCS temperature. The design calculations are performed with the assumption that the shutdown banks are withdrawn first. The shutdown banks are controlled manually by the control room operator. During normal unit operation, the shutdown banks are either fully withdrawn or fully inserted. The shutdown banks must be completely withdrawn from the core, prior to withdrawing any control banks during an approach to criticality. The shutdown banks can be fully withdrawn without the core going critical. This provides available negative reactivity in the event of boration errors.

The shutdown banks are then left in this position until the reactor is shut down.

They add negative reactivity to shut down the reactor upon receipt of a reactor trip signal.

APPLICABLE On a reactor trip, all RCCAs (shutdown banks and control banks), except SAFETY ANALYSES the most reactive RCCA, are assumed to insert into the core. The shutdown banks shall be at or above their insertion limits and available to insert the maximum amount of negative reactivity on a reactor trip signal. The control banks may be partially inserted in the core, as allowed by LCO 3.1.7, "Control Bank Insertion Limits." The shutdown bank and control bank insertion limits are established to ensure that a sufficient amount of negative reactivity is available to shut down the reactor and maintain the required SDM (see LCO 3.1.1, "SHUTDOWN MARGIN (SDM) - Tavg > 200°F," and LCO 3.1.2, "SHUTDOWN MARGIN (SDM) - Tavg < 200°F") following a reactor trip from full power. The combination of control banks and shutdown banks (less the most reactive RCCA, which is assumed to be fully withdrawn) is sufficient to take the reactor from full power conditions at rated temperature to zero power, and to maintain the required SDM at rated no load temperature (Ref. 3). The shutdown bank insertion limit also limits the reactivity worth of an ejected shutdown rod.

The acceptance criteria for addressing shutdown and control rod bank insertion limits and inoperability or misalignment is that:

a. There be no violations of:
1. specified Specified acceptable fuel design limits, or
2. RCS pressure boundary integrity; and (continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-36 Revision XX

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.6 BASES APPLICABLE b. The core remains subcritical after accident transients other than a main SAFETY ANALYSES steam line break (MSLB).

(continued)

As such, the shutdown bank insertion limits affect safety analysis involving core reactivity and SDM (Ref. 3).

The shutdown bank insertion limits preserve an initial condition assumed in the safety analyses and, as such, satisfy Criterion 2 of the NRC Policy Statement10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).

LCO The shutdown banks must be within their insertion limits any time the reactor is critical or approaching criticality. This ensures that a sufficient amount of negative reactivity is available to shut down the reactor and maintain the required SDM following a reactor trip.

The shutdown bank insertion limits are defined in the COLR.

The LCO is modified by a Note indicating the LCO requirement is not applicable to shutdown banks being inserted while performing SR 3.1.3.2. This SR verifies the freedom of the rods to move, and may require the shutdown bank to move below the LCO limits, which would normally violate the LCO. This Note applies to each shutdown bank as it is moved below the insertion limit to perform the SR.

This Note is not applicable should a malfunction stop performance of the SR.

APPLICABILITY The shutdown banks must be within their insertion limits, with the reactor in MODES 1 and 2. The applicability in MODE 2 begins prior to initial control bank withdrawal, during an approach to criticality, and continues throughout MODE 2, until all control bank rods are again fully inserted by reactor trip or by shutdown.

This ensures that a sufficient amount of negative reactivity is available to shut down the reactor and maintain the required SDM following a reactor trip. The shutdown banks do not have to be within their insertion limits in MODE 3, unless an approach to criticality is being made. Refer to LCO 3.1.1 and LCO 3.1.2 for SDM requirements in MODES 3, 4, and 5. LCO 3.9.1, "Boron Concentration,"

ensures adequate SDM in MODE 6.

The Applicability requirements have been modified by a Note indicating the LCO requirement is suspended during SR 3.1.5.2. This SR verifies the freedom of the rods to move, and requires the shutdown bank to move below the LCO limits, which would normally violate the LCO.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-37 Revision XX

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.6 BASES ACTIONS A.1, A.2.1, A.2.2, and A.3 If one shutdown bank is inserted less than or equal to 10 steps below the insertion limit, 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> is allowed to restore the shutdown bank to within the limit.

This is necessary because the available SDM may be reduced with a shutdown bank within its insertion limit. Also, verification of SDM or initiation of boration within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> is required, since the SDM in MODES 1 and 2 is ensured by adhering to the control and shutdown bank insertion limits (see LCO 3.1.1). If a shutdown bank is not within its insertion limit, SDM will be verified by performing a reactivity balance calculation, considering the effects listed in the BASES for SR 3.1.1.1.

While the shutdown bank is outside the insertion limit, all control banks must be within their insertion limits to ensure sufficient shutdown margin is available. The 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> Completion Time is sufficient to repair most rod control failures that would prevent movement of a shutdown bank.

AB.1.1, AB.1.2 and AB.2 When one or more shutdown banks is not within insertion limits for reasons other than Condition A, 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> is allowed to restore the shutdown banks to within the insertion limits. This is necessary because the available SDM may be significantly reduced, with one or more of the shutdown banks not within their insertion limits. Also, verification of SDM or initiation of boration within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> is required, since the SDM in MODES 1 and 2 is ensured by adhering to the control and shutdown bank insertion limits (see LCO 3.1.1). If shutdown banks are not within their insertion limits, then SDM will be verified by performing a reactivity balance calculation, considering the effects listed in the Bases for SR 3.1.1.1.

The allowed Completion Time of 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> provides an acceptable time for evaluating and repairing minor problems without allowing the plant to remain in an unacceptable condition for an extended period of time.

BC.1 If the shutdown banks cannot be restored to within their insertion limits within 2 hour2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br />sRequired Actions and associated Completion Times are not met, the unit must be brought to a MODE where the LCO is not applicable. The allowed Completion Time of 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching the required MODE from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-38 Revision XX

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.6 BASES SURVEILLANCE SR 3.1.6.1 REQUIREMENTS Verification that the shutdown banks are within their insertion limits prior to an approach to criticality ensures that when the reactor is critical, or being taken critical, the shutdown banks will be available to shut down the reactor, and the required SDM will be maintained following a reactor trip. This SR and Frequency ensure that the shutdown banks are withdrawn before the control banks are withdrawn during a unit startup.

The Surveillance is modified by a Note which states that the SR is not required to be performed for shutdown banks until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after motion of rods in those banks.

Rod temperature affects the accuracy of the rod position indication system. Due to changes in the magnetic permeability of the drive shaft as a function of temperature, the indicated position is expected to change with time as the drive shaft temperature changes. The one hour period allows rod temperature to stabilize following rod movement in order to ensure the indicated position is accurate.

Since the shutdown banks are positioned manually by the control room operator, a verification of shutdown bank position at a Frequency of 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />, after the reactor is taken critical, is adequate to ensure that they are within their insertion limits. Also, the 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> Frequency takes into account other information available in the control room for the purpose of monitoring the status of shutdown rods.

REFERENCES 1. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50, Appendix A, General Design Criterion 10, "Reactor Design," General Design Criterion 26, "Reactivity Control System Redundancy and Capability," and General Design Criterion 28, "Reactivity Limits."

2. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50.46, "Acceptance Criteria for Emergency Core Cooling Systems for Light Water Nuclear Power Reactors."
3. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.0, "Accident Analyses."

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-39 Revision XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES B 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS B 3.1.7 Control Bank Insertion Limits BASES BACKGROUND The insertion limits of the shutdown and control rods are initial assumptions in all safety analyses that assume rod insertion upon reactor trip. The insertion limits directly affect core power and fuel burnup distributions and assumptions of available ejected rod worth, SDM, and initial reactivity insertion rate.

The applicable criteria for these reactivity and power distribution design requirements are 10 CFR 50, Appendix A, GDC 10, "Reactor Design," GDC 26, "Reactivity Control System Redundancy and Capability," and GDC 28, "Reactivity Limits" (Ref. 1), and 10 CFR 50.46, "Acceptance Criteria for Emergency Core Cooling Systems for Light Water Nuclear Power Reactors" (Ref. 2). Limits on control rod insertion have been established, and all rod positions are monitored and controlled during power operation to ensure that the power distribution and reactivity limits defined by the design power peaking and SDM limits are preserved.

The rod cluster control assemblies (RCCAs) are divided among control banks and shutdown banks. Each bank may be further subdivided into two groups to provide for precise reactivity control (Shutdown Banks C and D have only one group each). A group consists of two or more RCCAs that are electrically paralleled to step simultaneously. Except for Shutdown Banks C and D, a bank of RCCAs consists of two groups that are moved in a staggered fashion, but always within one step of each other. There are four control banks and four shutdown banks. See LCO 3.1.5, "Rod Group Alignment Limits," for control and shutdown rod OPERABILITY and alignment requirements, and LCO 3.1.8, "Rod Position Indication," for position indication requirements.

The control bank insertion limits are specified in the COLR. An example is provided for information only in Figure B 3.1.7-1. The control banks are required to be at or above the insertion limit lines.

Figure B 3.1.7-1 also indicates how the control banks are moved in an overlap pattern. Overlap is the distance traveled together by two control banks. The predetermined position of control bank C, at which control bank D will begin (continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-40 Revision XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES BACKGROUND to move with bank C on a withdrawal, as an example may be at 128 steps (continued). Therefore, in this example, control bank C overlaps control bank D from 128 steps to the fully withdrawn position for control bank C. The fully withdrawn position and predetermined overlap positions are defined in the COLR.

The control banks are used for precise reactivity control of the reactor. The positions of the control banks are normally controlled automatically by the Rod Control System, but can also be manually controlled. They are capable of adding reactivity very quickly (compared to borating or diluting).

The power density at any point in the core must be limited, so that the fuel design criteria are maintained. Together, LCO 3.1.5, Rod Group Alignment Limits, LCO 3.1.6, "Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits," LCO 3.1.7, Control Bank Insertion Limits, LCO 3.2.3, "AXIAL FLUX DIFFERENCE (AFD)," and LCO 3.2.4, "QUADRANT POWER TILT RATIO (QPTR)," provide limits on control component operation and on monitored process variables, which ensure that the core operates within the fuel design criteria.

The shutdown and control bank insertion and alignment limits, AFD, and QPTR are process variables that together characterize and control the three dimensional power distribution of the reactor core. Additionally, the control bank insertion limits control the reactivity that could be added in the event of a rod ejection accident, and the shutdown and control bank insertion limits ensure the required SDM is maintained.

Operation within the subject LCO limits will prevent fuel cladding failures that would breach the primary fission product barrier and release fission products to the reactor coolant in the event of a loss of coolant accident (LOCA), loss of flow, ejected rod, or other accident requiring termination by a Reactor Trip System (RTS) trip function.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-41 Revision XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES APPLICABLE The shutdown and control bank insertion limits, AFD, and QPTR LCOs are SAFETY ANALYSES required to prevent power distributions that could result in fuel cladding failures in the event of a LOCA, loss of flow, ejected rod, or other accident requiring termination by an RTS trip function.

The acceptance criteria for addressing shutdown and control bank insertion limits and inoperability or misalignment are that:

a. There be no violations of:
1. specified Specified acceptable fuel design limits, or
2. Reactor Coolant System pressure boundary integrity; and
b. The core remains subcritical after accident transients other than a main steam line break (MSLB).

As such, the shutdown and control bank insertion limits affect safety analysis involving core reactivity and power distributions (Ref. 3 through 13).

The SDM requirement is ensured by limiting the control and shutdown bank insertion limits so that allowable inserted worth of the RCCAs is such that sufficient reactivity is available in the rods to shut down the reactor to hot zero power with a reactivity margin that assumes the maximum worth RCCA remains fully withdrawn upon trip (Ref. 5, 6, 8 and 11).

Operation at the insertion limits or AFD limits may approach the maximum allowable linear heat generation rate or peaking factor with the allowed QPTR present. Operation at the insertion limit may also indicate the maximum ejected RCCA worth could be equal to the limiting value in fuel cycles that have sufficiently high ejected RCCA worths.

The control and shutdown bank insertion limits ensure that safety analyses assumptions for SDM, ejected rod worth, and power distribution peaking factors are preserved (Ref. 3 through 13).

The insertion limits satisfy Criterion 2 of the NRC Policy Statement10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), in that they are initial conditions assumed in the safety analysis.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-42 Revision XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES LCO The limits on control banks sequence, overlap, and physical insertion, as defined in the COLR, must be maintained because they serve the function of preserving power distribution, ensuring that the SDM is maintained, ensuring that ejected rod worth is maintained, and ensuring adequate negative reactivity insertion is available on trip. The overlap between control banks provides more uniform rates of reactivity insertion and withdrawal and is imposed to maintain acceptable power peaking during control bank motion.

The LCO is modified by a Note indicating the LCO requirement is not applicable to control banks being inserted while performing SR 3.1.5.2. This SR verifies the freedom of the rods to move, and may require the control bank to move below the LCO limits, which would normally violate the LCO. This Note applies to each control bank as it is moved below the insertion limit to perform the SR. This Note is not applicable should a malfunction stop performance of the SR.

APPLICABILITY The control bank sequence, overlap, and physical insertion limits shall be maintained with the reactor in MODES 1 and 2 with keff > 1.0. These limits must be maintained, since they preserve the assumed power distribution, ejected rod worth, SDM, and reactivity rate insertion assumptions. Applicability in MODES 3, 4, and 5 is not required, since neither the power distribution nor ejected rod worth assumptions would be exceeded in these MODES.

The applicability requirements have been modified by a Note indicating the LCO requirements are suspended during the performance of SR 3.1.5.2. This SR verifies the freedom of the rods to move, and requires the control bank to move below the LCO limits, which would violate the LCO.

ACTIONS A.1, A.2.1, A.2.2, and A.3 If Control Bank A, B, or C is inserted less than or equal to 10 steps below the insertion, sequence, or overlap limits, 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> is allowed to restore the control bank to within the limits. Verification of SDM or initiation of boration within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> is required, since the SDM in MODES 1 and 2 is ensured by adhering to the control and shutdown bank insertion limits (see LCO 3.1.1). If a control bank is not within its insertion limit, SDM will be verified by performing a reactivity balance calculation, considering the effects listed in the BASES for SR 3.1.1.1.

While the control bank is outside the insertion, sequence, or overlap limits, all shutdown banks must be within their insertion limits to ensure sufficient shutdown margin is available and that power distribution is controlled. The 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> Completion Time is sufficient to repair most rod control failures that would prevent movement of a shutdown bank.

Condition A is limited to Control Banks A, B, or C. The allowance is not required for Control Bank D because the full power bank insertion limit can be met during performance of the SR 3.1.5.2 control rod freedom of movement (trippability) testing.

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-43

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES ACTIONS AB.1.1, AB.1.2, AB.2, BC.1.1, BC.1.2, and BC.2 When the control banks are outside the acceptable insertion limits for reasons other than Condition A, they must be restored to within those limits. This restoration can occur in two ways:

a. Reducing power to be consistent with rod position; or
b. Moving rods to be consistent with power.

Also, verification of SDM or initiation of boration to regain SDM is required within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />, since the SDM in MODES 1 and 2 normally ensured by adhering to the control and shutdown bank insertion limits (see LCO 3.1.1, "SHUTDOWN MARGIN (SDM) - Tavg > 200°F") has been upset. If control banks are not within their insertion limits, then SDM will be verified by performing a reactivity balance calculation, considering the effects listed in the Bases for SR 3.1.1.1.

Similarly, if the control banks are found to be out of sequence or in the wrong overlap configuration for reasons other than Condition A, they must be restored to meet the limits.

Operation beyond the LCO limits is allowed for a short time period in order to take conservative action because the simultaneous occurrence of either a LOCA, loss of flow accident, ejected rod accident, or other accident during this short time period, together with an inadequate power distribution or reactivity capability, has an acceptably low probability.

The allowed Completion Time of 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> for restoring the banks to within the insertion, sequence, and overlap limits provides an acceptable time for evaluating and repairing minor problems without allowing the plant to remain in an unacceptable condition for an extended period of time.

CD.1 If the Required Actions A.1 and A.2, or B.1 and B.2 cannot be completed within the associated Completion Times, the plant must be brought to MODE 32 with keff

< 1.0, where the LCO is not applicable. The allowed Completion Time of 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching the required MODE from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-44 Revision XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES SURVEILLANCE SR 3.1.7.1 REQUIREMENTS This Surveillance is required to ensure that the reactor does not achieve criticality with the control banks below their insertion limits.

The estimated critical position (ECP) depends upon a number of factors, one of which is xenon concentration. If the ECP was calculated long before criticality, xenon concentration could change to make the ECP substantially in error.

Conversely, determining the ECP immediately before criticality could be an unnecessary burden. There are a number of unit parameters requiring operator attention at that point. Performing the ECP calculation within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> prior to criticality avoids a large error from changes in xenon concentration, but allows the operator some flexibility to schedule the ECP calculation with other startup activities.

SR 3.1.7.2 With an OPERABLE bank insertion limit monitor, verification of the control bank insertion limits at a Frequency of 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> is sufficient to ensure OPERABILITY of the bank insertion limit monitor and to detect control banks that may be approaching the insertion limits since, normally, very little rod motion occurs in 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />. If the insertion limit monitor becomes inoperable, verification of the control bank position at a Frequency of 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> is sufficient to detect control banks that may be approaching the insertion limits.

The Surveillance is modified by a Note stating that the SR is not required to be performed for control banks until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after motion of rods in those banks.

Control rod temperature affects the accuracy of the rod position indication system. Due to changes in the magnetic permeability of the drive shaft as a function of temperature, the indicated position is expected to change with time as the drive shaft temperature changes. The one hour period allows control rod temperature to stabilize following rod movement in order to ensure the indicated rod position is accurate.

SR 3.1.7.3 When control banks are maintained within their insertion limits as checked by SR 3.1.7.2 above, it is unlikely that their sequence and overlap will not be in accordance with requirements provided in the COLR. A Frequency of 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> is consistent with the insertion limit check above in SR 3.1.7.2.

The Surveillance is modified by a Note stating that the SR is not required to be performed for control banks until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after motion of rods in those banks.

Control rod temperature affects the accuracy of the rod position indication system. Due to changes in the magnetic permeability of the drive shaft as a function of temperature, the indicated position is expected to change with time as the drive shaft temperature changes. The one hour period allows control rod temperature to stabilize following rod movement in order to ensure the indicated rod position is accurate.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-45 Revision XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES SURVEILLANCE SR 3.1.7.3 (continued)

REQUIREMENTS A Frequency of 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> is consistent with the insertion limit check above in SR 3.1.7.2.

REFERENCES 1. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50, Appendix A, General Design Criterion 10, "Reactor Design," General Design Criterion 26, "Reactivity Control System Redundancy and Capability," and General Design Criterion 28, "Reactivity Limits."

2. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50.46, "Acceptance Criteria for Emergency Core Cooling Systems for Light Water Nuclear Power Reactors."
3. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.1, "Uncontrolled Rod Cluster Control Assembly Bank Withdrawal From a Subcritical Condition."
4. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.2, "Uncontrolled Rod Cluster Control Assembly Bank Withdrawal At Power."
5. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.3, "Rod Cluster Control Assembly Misalignment."
6. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.4, "Uncontrolled Boron Dilution."
7. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.5, "Partial Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow."
8. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.13, "Accidental Depressurization of the Main Steam System."
9. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.3.4, "Complete Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow."
10. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.3.6, "Single Rod Cluster Control Assembly Withdrawal At Full Power."
11. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.2.1, "Major Rupture of Main Steam Line."
12. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.4, "Single Reactor Coolant Pump Locked Rotor."
13. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.6, "Rupture of a Control Rod Drive Mechanism Housing (Rod Cluster Control Assembly Ejection)."

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-46 Revision XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-47 Revision XX

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 B 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS B 3.1.8 Rod Position Indication BASES BACKGROUND According to GDC 13 (Ref. 1), instrumentation to monitor variables and systems over their operating ranges during normal operation, anticipated operational occurrences, and accident conditions must be OPERABLE.

LCO 3.1.8 is required to ensure OPERABILITY of the control rod position indicators to determine control rod positions and thereby ensure compliance with the control rod alignment and insertion limits.

The OPERABILITY, including position indication, of the shutdown and control rods is an initial assumption in all safety analyses that assume rod insertion upon reactor trip. Maximum rod misalignment is an initial assumption in the safety analysis that directly affects core power distributions and assumptions of available SDM. Rod position indication is required to assess OPERABILITY and misalignment.

Mechanical or electrical failures may cause a control rod to become inoperable or to become misaligned from its group. Control rod inoperability or misalignment may cause increased power peaking, due to the asymmetric reactivity distribution and a reduction in the total available rod worth for reactor shutdown. Therefore, control rod alignment and OPERABILITY are related to core operation in design power peaking limits and the core design requirement of a minimum SDM.

Limits on control rod alignment and OPERABILITY have been established, and all rod positions are monitored and controlled during power operation to ensure that the power distribution and reactivity limits defined by the design power peaking and SDM limits are preserved.

Rod cluster control assemblies (RCCAs), or rods, are moved out of the core (up or withdrawn) or into the core (down or inserted) by their control rod drive mechanisms. The RCCAs are divided among control banks and shutdown banks. Each bank may be further subdivided into two groups to provide for precise reactivity control (Shutdown Banks C and D have only one group each).

The axial position of shutdown rods and control rods are determined by two separate and independent systems: the Bank Demand Position Indication System (commonly called group step counters) and the analog Analog Rod Position Indication (ARPI) System.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-48 Revision 51, XX

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES BACKGROUND The Bank Demand Position Indication System counts the pulses from the Rod (continued) Control System that move the rods. There is one step counter for each group of rods. Individual rods in a group all receive the same signal to move and should, therefore, all be at the same position indicated by the group step counter for that group. The Bank Demand Position Indication System is considered highly precise

(+/-+ 1 step or +/-+ 5/8 inch). If a rod does not move one step for each demand pulse, the step counter will still count the pulse and incorrectly reflect the position of the rod.

The ARPI System provides an accurate indication of actual control rod position, but at a lower precision than the step counters. This system is based on inductive analog signals from a series of coils spaced along a hollow tube with a center to center distance of 3.75 inches, which is 6 steps. The normal indication accuracy of the ARPI System is +/-+ 6 steps (+/-+ 3.75 inches), and the maximum uncertainty is

+/-+ 12 steps (+/-+ 7.5 inches). With an indicated deviation of 12 steps between the group step counter and ARPI, the maximum deviation between actual rod position and the demand position could be 24 steps, or 15 inches.

APPLICABLE Control and shutdown rod position accuracy is essential during power operation.

SAFETY ANALYSES Power peaking, ejected rod worth, or SDM limits may be violated in the event of a Design Basis Accident (Ref. 2 through 12), with control or shutdown rods operating outside their limits undetected. Therefore, the acceptance criteria for rod position indication is that rod positions must be known with sufficient accuracy in order to verify the core is operating within the group sequence, overlap, design peaking limits, ejected rod worth, and with minimum SDM (LCO 3.1.6, "Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits," and LCO 3.1.7, "Control Bank Insertion Limits"). The rod positions must also be known in order to verify the alignment limits are preserved (LCO 3.1.5, "Rod Group Alignment Limits"). Control rod positions are continuously monitored to provide operators with information that ensures the plant is operating within the bounds of the accident analysis assumptions.

The control rod position indicator channels satisfy Criterion 2 of the NRC Policy Statement10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii). The control rod position indicators monitor control rod position, which is an initial condition of the accident.

LCO LCO 3.1.8 specifies that the ARPI System and the Bank Demand Position Indication System be OPERABLE for all control rods. For the control rod position indicators to be OPERABLE requires meeting the SR of the LCO (when required) and the following:

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-49 Revision XX

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES LCO a. The ARPI System indicates within 12 steps of the group step counter (continued) demand position as required by LCO 3.1.5, "Rod Group Alignment Limits;"

b. For the ARPI System there are no failed coils; and
c. The Bank Demand Indication System has been calibrated either in the fully inserted position or to the ARPI System.

The SR of the LCO is modified by a Note which states it is not required to be met for RPIs associated with rods that do not meet LCO 3.1.5. If a rod is known to not be within 12 steps of the group demand position, the Actions of LCO 3.1.5 provide appropriate Actions. Otherwise, The the 12 step agreement limit between the Bank Demand Position Indication System and the ARPI System indicates that the Bank Demand Position Indication System is adequately calibrated, and can be used for indication of the measurement of control rod bank position.

A deviation of less than the allowable limit, given in LCO 3.1.5, in position indication for a single control rod, ensures high confidence that the position uncertainty of the corresponding control rod group is within the assumed values used in the analysis (that specified control rod group insertion limits).

These requirements ensure that control rod position indication during power operation and PHYSICS TESTS is accurate, and that design assumptions are not challenged. OPERABILITY of the position indicator channels ensures that inoperable, misaligned, or mispositioned control rods can be detected.

Therefore, power peaking, ejected rod worth, and SDM can be controlled within acceptable limits.

The LCO is modified by a Note stating that the RPI system is not required to be OPERABLE for 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> following movement of the associated rods. Control and shutdown rod temperature affects the accuracy of the RPI System. Due to changes in the magnetic permeability of the drive shaft as a function of temperature, the indicated position is expected to change with time as the drive shaft temperature changes. The one hour period allows temperature to stabilize following rod movement in order to ensure the indicated positon is accurate.

APPLICABILITY The requirements on the ARPI and step counters are only applicable in MODES 1 and 2 (consistent with LCO 3.1.5, LCO 3.1.6, and LCO 3.1.7),

because these are the only MODES in which power is generated, and the OPERABILITY and alignment of rods have the potential to affect the safety of the plant. In the shutdown MODES, the OPERABILITY of the shutdown and control banks has the potential to affect the required SDM, but this effect can be compensated for by an increase in the boron concentration of the Reactor Coolant System.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-50 Revision 70 Amendment 58

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES ACTIONS The ACTIONS table is modified by a Note indicating that a separate Condition entry is allowed for each inoperable rod position indicator per group and each demand position indicator per bank. This is acceptable because the Required Actions for each Condition provide appropriate compensatory actions for each inoperable position indicator.

A.1, A.2.1, and A.2.2 When one ARPI channel per group in one or more groups fails, the position of the rod can still be determined indirectly by use of incore power distribution measurement information. Incore power distribution measurement information can be obtained from flux traces using the Movable Incore Detector System or from an OPERABLE Power Distribution Monitoring System (PDMS) (ref. 15). The Required Action may also be satisfied by ensuring at least once per 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> that FQ N

satisfies LCO 3.2.1, F H satisfies LCO 3.2.2, and SHUTDOWN MARGIN is within the limits provided in the COLR, provided the non-indicating rods have not been moved. Based on experience, normal power operation does not require excessive movement of banks. If a bank has been significantly moved, the Required Action of BC.1 or BC.2 below is required. Therefore, verification of RCCA position within the Completion Time of 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> is adequate for allowing continued full power operation, since the probability of simultaneously having a rod significantly out of position and an event sensitive to that rod position is small.

Required Action A.1 requires verification of the positon of a rod with an inoperable RPI once per 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> which may put excessive wear and tear on the moveable incore detector system. Required Action A.2.1 provides an alternative. Required Action A.2.1 requires verification of rod position using the incore power distribution measurement information every 31 EFPD, which coincides with the normal measurements to verify core power distribution.

Required Action A.2.1 includes six distinct requirements for verification of the position of rods associated with an inoperable RPI using incore power distribution measurements information:

a. Initial verification within 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> of the inoperability of the RPI;
b. Re-verification once every 31 Effective Full Power Days (EFPD) thereafter;
c. Verification within 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> if rod control system parameters indicate unintended rod movement. An unintended rod movement is defined as the release of the rods stationary gripper when no action was demanded either manually or automatically from the rod control system, or a rod motion in a direction other than the direction demanded by the rod control system. Verifying that no unintended rod movement has occurred is performed by monitoring the rod control system stationary gripper coil current for indications of rod movement; (continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-51 Revision 70 Amendment 58

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES ACTIONS d. Verification within 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> if the rod with an inoperable RPI is (continued) intentionally moved greater than 12 steps;

e. Verification prior to exceeding 50% RTP if power is reduced below 50% RTP; and
f. Verification within 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> of reaching 100% RTP if power is reduced to less than 100% power RTP.

Should the rod with the inoperable RPI be moved more than 12 steps, or if reactor power is changed, the position of the rod with the inoperable RPI must be verified.

Required Action A.2.2 states that the inoperable RPI must be restored to OPERABLE status prior to entering MODE 2 from MODE 3. The repair of the inoperable RPI must be performed prior to returning to power operation following a shutdown.

A.2.1, A.2.2 The control rod drive mechanism (a portion of the rod control system) consists of four separate subassemblies; 1) the pressure vessel, 2) the coil stack assembly, 3) the latch assembly, and 4) the drive rod assembly.

The coil stack assembly contains three operating coils; 1) the stationary gripper coil, 2) the moveable gripper coil, and 3) the lift coil. In support of Actions A.2.1 and A.2.2, a Temporary Alteration (TA) to the configuration of the plant is implemented to provide instrumentation for the monitoring of the rod control system parameters in the Main Control Room. The TA creates a circuit that monitors the operation and timing of the lift coil and the stationary gripper coil. Additional details regarding the TA are provided in the FSAR (Ref. 14).

Required Actions A.2.1 and A.1 are essentially the same. Therefore, the discussion provided above for Required Action A.1 applies to Required Action A.2.1. The options provided by Required Actions A.2.1 and A.2.2 allow for continued operation in a situation where the component causing the ARPI to be inoperable is inaccessible due to operating conditions (adverse radiological or temperature environment). In this situation, repair of the ARPI cannot occur until the unit is in an operating MODE that allows access to the failed components.

In addition to the initial 8 hour9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> verification, Required Action A.2.1 also requires the following for the rod with the failed ARPI:

1. Verification of the position of the rod every 31 days using either the incore movable detectors or the PDMS.
2. Verification of the position of the rod using either the incore movable detectors or the PDMS within 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> of the performance of Required Action A.2.2 whenever there is an indication of unintended rod movement based on the parameters of the rod (continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-52 Revision 70 Amendment 58

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES control system.

ACTIONS A.2.1, A.2.2 (continued)

Required Action A.2.2 is in lieu of the verification of the position of the rod using either the incore movable detectors or PDMS every 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> as required by Required Action A.1. This action alleviates the potential for excessive wear on the incore system due to the repeated use of the incore detectors. Once the position of the rod with the failed ARPI is confirmed through the use of either the moveable incore detectors or PDMS in accordance with Required Action A.2.1, the parameters of the rod control system must be monitored until the failed ARPI is repaired. Should the review of the rod control system parameters indicate unintended movement of the rod, the position of the rod must be verified within 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> in accordance with Required Action A.2.1. Should there be unintended movement of the rod with the failed ARPI, an alarm will be received. Alarms will also be received if the rod steps in a direction other than what was demanded, and if the circuitry of the TA fails. Receipt of any alarm requires the verification of the position of the rod in accordance with Required Action A.2.1.

Required Actions A.2.1, A.2.2 and A.2.3 are modified by a note. The note clarifies that rod position monitoring by Required Actions A.2.1 and A.2.2 shall only be applied to one rod with an inoperable ARPI and shall only be allowed until the end of the current cycle. Further, Required Actions A.2.1, A.2.2 and A.2.3 shall not be allowed after the plant has been in MODE 5 or other plant condition, for a sufficient period of time, in which the repair of the inoperable ARPI(s) could have safely been performed.

As indicated previously, the modifications required for the monitoring of the rod control system will be implemented as a TA. Implementation of the TA includes a review for the impact on plant procedures and training. This ensures that changes are initiated for key issues like the monitoring requirements in the control room, and operator training on the temporary equipment.

A.2.3 Required Action A.2.3 addresses two contingency measures when the TA is utilized:

1. Verification of the position of the rod with the inoperable ARPI by use of either the moveable incore detectors or PDMS, whenever the rod is moved greater than 12 steps in one direction.
2. Operation of the unit when THERMAL POWER is less than or equal to 50% RTP.

For the first contingency, the rod group alignment limits of LCO 3.1.5 require that all shutdown and control rods be within 12 steps of their group step counter demand position. The limits on shutdown or control rod (continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-53 Revision 70 Amendment 58

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES ACTIONS A.2.3 (continued)

(continued) alignments ensure that the assumptions in the safety analysis will remain valid and that the assumed reactivity will be available to be inserted for a unit shutdown. Therefore, this conservative measure ensures LCO 3.1.5 is met whenever the rod with the inoperable ARPI is moved greater than 12 steps. For the second contingency, the reduction of THERMAL POWER to less than or equal to 50% RTP puts the core into a condition where rod position is not significantly affecting core peaking factors (Ref. 13). Consistent with LCO 3.0.4 and this action, unit startup and operation to less than or equal to 50% RTP may occur with one ARPI per group inoperable. However, prior to escalating THERMAL POWER above 50% RTP, the position of the rod with an inoperable ARPI must be verified by use of either the moveable incore detectors or PDMS. Once 100%

RTP is achieved, the position of the rod must be reverified within 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> by use of either the moveable incore detectors or PDMS. Monitoring of the rod control system parameters in accordance with Required Action A.2.2 for the rod with an inoperable ARPI may resume upon completion of the verification at 100% RTP.

A.3 Reduction of THERMAL POWER to 50% RTP puts core into a condition where rod position is not significantly affecting core peaking factors (Ref.

4). The allowed Completion Time of 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reducing power to 50% RTP from full power conditions without challenging plant systems and allowing for rod positon determination by Required Action A.1 above.

Required Action A.3 applies whenever the TA is not utilized. The discussion for Required Action A.2.3 (above) clarified that a reduction of THERMAL POWER to less than or equal to 50% RTP puts the core into a condition where rod position is not significantly affecting core peaking factors (Ref. 13). The allowed Completion Time of 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reducing power to less than or equal to 50% RTP from full power conditions without challenging plant systems and allowing for rod position determination by Required Action A.1 above.

Consistent with LCO 3.0.4 and this action, unit startup and operation to less than or equal to 50% RTP may occur with one ARPI per group inoperable. Thermal Power may be escalated to 100% RTP as long as Required Action A.1 is satisfied.

B.1 and B.2 When more than one RPI per group in one or more groups fail, additional actions are necessary. Placing the Rod Control System in manual assures unplanned rod motion will not occur. The immediate Completion Time for placing the Rod Control System in manual reflects the urgency with which unplanned rod motion must be prevented while in this Condition.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-54 Revision 70 Amendment 58

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES ACTIONS The inoperable RPIs must be restored, such that a maximum of one RPI (continued) per group is inoperable, within 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />. The 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> Completion Time provides sufficient time to troubleshoot and restore the RPI system to operation while avoiding the plant challenges associated with the shutdown without full rod position indication.

Based on operating experience, normal power operation does not require excessive rod movement. If one or more rods has been significantly moved, the Required Action of C.1 or C.2 below is required.

BC.1 and BC.2 With one or more RPI inoperable in one or more groups and the affected groups have moved greater than 24 steps in one direction since the last determination of rod position, additional actions are needed to verify the position of rods with inoperable RPI. Within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />, the position of the rods with inoperable position indication must be determined using either the moveable incore detectors or PDMS to verify These Required Actions clarify that when one or more rods with inoperable position indicators have been moved in excess of 24 steps in one direction, since the position was last determined, the Required Actions of A.1 and A.2 are still appropriate but must be initiated promptly under Required Action B.1 to begin verifying that these rods are still properly positioned, relative to their group positions.

If, within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />, the rod positions have not been determined, THERMAL POWER must be reduced to less than or equal to 50% RTP within 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> to avoid undesirable power distributions that could result from continued operation at greater than 50% RTP, if one or more rods are misaligned by more than 24 steps. The allowed Completion Time of 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> provides an acceptable period of time to verify the rod positions.

CD.1.1 and CD.1.2 With one or more demand position indicators per bank inoperable in one or more banks, the rod positions can be determined by the ARPI System.

Since normal power operation does not require excessive movement of rods, verification by administrative means that the rod position indicators are OPERABLE and the most withdrawn rod and the least withdrawn rod are less than or equal to 12 steps apart within the allowed Completion Time of once every 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> is adequate.

CD.2 Reduction of THERMAL POWER to less than or equal to 50% RTP puts the core into a condition where rod position is not significantly affecting core peaking factor limits (Ref. 13). The allowed Completion Time of 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> provides an acceptable period of time to verify the rod positions per Required Actions CD.1.1 and CD.1.2 or reduce power to less than or equal to 50% RTP.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-55 Revision 70 Amendment 58

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES DE.1 If the Required Actions cannot be completed within the associated Completion Time, the plant must be brought to a MODE in which the requirement does not apply. To achieve this status, the plant must be brought to at least MODE 3 within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />. The allowed Completion Time is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching the required MODE from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.

SURVEILLANCE SR 3.1.8.1 REQUIREMENTS Verification that the ARPI agrees with the demand position within 12 steps ensures that the ARPI is operating correctly.

This Surveillance is performed prior to reactor criticality after each removal of the reactor head, as there is The 18 month Frequency is based on the need to perform this Surveillance under the conditions that apply during a plant outage and the potential for unnecessary plant transients if the SR were performed with the reactor at power. Operating experience has shown these components usually pass the SR when performed at a Frequency of once every 18 months. Therefore, the Frequency was concluded to be acceptable from a reliability standpoint.

The Surveillance is modified by a Note which states it is not required to be met for RPIs associated with rods that do not meet LCO 3.1.5. If a rod is known to not be within 12 steps of the group demand position, the ACTIONS of LCO 3.1.5 provide the appropriate Actions.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-56 Revision 70 Amendment 58

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES (continued)

REFERENCES 1. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50, Appendix A, General Design Criterion 13, "Instrumentation and Control."

2. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.1, Uncontrolled Rod Cluster Control Assembly Bank Withdrawal From a Subcritical Condition."
3. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.2, Uncontrolled Rod Cluster Control Assembly Bank Withdrawal At Power."
4. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.3, Rod Cluster Control Assembly Misalignment."
5. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.4, Uncontrolled Boron Dilution."
6. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.5, Partial Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow."
7. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.13, Accidental Depressurization of the Main Steam System."
8. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.3.4, Complete Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow."
9. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.3.6, Single Rod Cluster Control Assembly Withdrawal At Full Power."
10. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.2.1, Major Rupture of Main Steam Line."
11. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.4, Single Reactor Coolant Pump Locked Rotor."
12. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.6, Rupture of a Control Rod Drive Mechanism Housing (Rod Cluster Control Assembly Ejection)."
13. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 4.3, Nuclear Design."
14. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 7.7.1.3.2, Main Control Room Rod Position Indication.
15. WCAP-12472-P-A,BEACON Core Monitoring and Operations Support System, August 1994.

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-54a Revision 70, 104 Amendment 58, 82

This Page Intentionally Left Blank.

Enclosure 6 Proposed Technical Specification Bases Changes (Mark-Up) for WBN Unit 2 (For Information Only)

CNL-17-123

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 B 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS B 3.1.5 Rod Group Alignment Limits BASES BACKGROUND The OPERABILITY (e.g., trippability) of the shutdown and control rods is an initial assumption in all safety analyses that assume rod insertion upon reactor trip. Maximum rod misalignment is an initial assumption in the safety analysis that directly affects core power distributions and assumptions of available SDM.

The applicable criteria for these reactivity and power distribution design requirements are 10 CFR 50, Appendix A, GDC 10, "Reactor Design,"

and GDC 26, "Reactivity Control System Redundancy and Capability,"

(Ref. 1), and 10 CFR 50.46, "Acceptance Criteria for Emergency Core Cooling Systems for Light Water Nuclear Power Reactors" (Ref. 2).

Mechanical or electrical failures may cause a control or shutdown rod to become inoperable or to become misaligned from its group. Control rod inoperability or misalignment may cause increased power peaking, due to the asymmetric reactivity distribution and a reduction in the total available rod worth for reactor shutdown. Therefore, control rod alignment and OPERABILITY are related to core operation in design power peaking limits and the core design requirement of a minimum SDM.

Limits on control rod alignment have been established, and all rod positions are monitored and controlled during power operation to ensure that the power distribution and reactivity limits defined by the design power peaking and SDM limits are preserved.

Rod cluster control assemblies (RCCAs), or rods, are moved by their control rod drive mechanisms (CRDMs). Each CRDM moves its RCCA one step (approximately 5/8 inch) at a time, but at varying rates (steps per minute) depending on the signal output from the Rod Control System.

The RCCAs are divided among control banks and shutdown banks. Each bank may be further subdivided into two groups to provide for precise reactivity control (Shutdown Banks C and D have only one group each).

A group consists of two or more RCCAs that are electrically paralleled to step simultaneously. Except for Shutdown Banks C and D, (continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-25 Revision XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES BACKGROUND a bank of RCCAs consists of two groups that are moved in a staggered (continued) fashion, but always within one step of each other. There are four control banks and four shutdown banks.

The shutdown banks are maintained either in the fully inserted or fully withdrawn position. The control banks are moved in an overlap pattern, using the following withdrawal sequence: When control bank A reaches a predetermined height in the core, control bank B begins to move out with control bank A. Control bank A stops at the position of maximum withdrawal, and control bank B continues to move out. When control bank B reaches a predetermined height, control bank C begins to move out with control bank B. This sequence continues until control banks A, B, and C are at the fully withdrawn position, and control bank D is approximately halfway withdrawn. The insertion sequence is the opposite of the withdrawal sequence. The control rods are arranged in a radially symmetric pattern, so that control bank motion does not introduce radial asymmetries in the core power distributions.

The axial position of shutdown rods and control rods is indicated by two separate and independent systems, which are the Bank Demand Position Indication System (commonly called group step counters) and the Rod Position Indication (RPI) System.

The Bank Demand Position Indication System counts the pulses from the rod control system that moves the rods. There is one step counter for each group of rods. Individual rods in a group all receive the same signal to move and should, therefore, all be at the same position indicated by the group step counter for that group. The Bank Demand Position Indication System is considered highly precise (+/- 1 step or +/- 5/8 inch). If a rod does not move one step for each demand pulse, the step counter will still count the pulse and incorrectly reflect the position of the rod.

The RPI System provides an accurate indication of actual control rod position, but at a lower precision than the step counters. This system is based on inductive analog signals from a series of coils spaced along a hollow tube with a center to center distance of 3.75 inches, which is six steps. The normal indication accuracy of the RPI System is +/- 6 steps

(+/- 3.75 inches), and the maximum uncertainty is +/- 12 steps

(+/- 7.5 inches). With an indicated deviation of 12 steps between the group step counter and RPI, the maximum deviation between actual rod position and the demand position could be 24 steps, or 15 inches.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-26 (continued)

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES (continued)

APPLICABLE Control rod misalignment accidents are analyzed in the safety analysis SAFETY (Ref. 3). The acceptance criteria for addressing control rod inoperability ANALYSES or misalignment are that:

a. There be no violations of:
1. specified Specified acceptable fuel design limits, or
2. Reactor Coolant System (RCS) pressure boundary integrity; and
b. The core remains subcritical after accident transients other than a main steam line break (MSLB).

Two types of misalignment are distinguished. During movement of a control rod group, one rod may stop moving, while the other rods in the group continue. This condition may cause excessive power peaking.

The second type of misalignment occurs if one rod fails to insert upon a reactor trip and remains stuck fully withdrawn. This condition requires an evaluation to determine that sufficient reactivity worth is held in the control rods to meet the SDM requirement, with the maximum worth rod stuck fully withdrawn.

Three types of analysis are performed in regard to static rod misalignment (Ref. 4). The first type of analysis considers the case where any one rod is completely inserted into the core with all other rods completely withdrawn. With control banks at their insertion limits, the second type of analysis considers the case when any one rod is completely inserted into the core. The third type of analysis considers the case of a completely withdrawn single rod from a bank inserted to its insertion limit. Satisfying limits on departure from nucleate boiling ratio in both of these cases bounds the situation when a rod is misaligned from its group by 12 steps.

Another type of misalignment occurs if one RCCA fails to insert upon a reactor trip in response to a main steam pipe rupture and remains stuck fully withdrawn. This condition is assumed in the evaluation to determine that the required SDM is met with the maximum worth RCCA also fully withdrawn (Ref. 5). The reactor is shutdown by the boric acid injection delivered by the ECCS.

The Required Actions in this LCO ensure that either deviations from the alignment limits will be corrected or that THERMAL POWER will be adjusted so that excessive local linear heat rates (LHRs) will not occur, and that the requirements on SDM and ejected rod worth are preserved.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-27 Revision XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES APPLICABLE Continued operation of the reactor with a misaligned control rod is SAFETY allowed if the heat flux hot channel factor (FQ(Z)) and the nuclear enthalpy ANALYSES hot channel factor (FNH) are verified to be within their limits in the COLR (continued) and the safety analysis is verified to remain valid. When a control rod is misaligned, the assumptions that are used to determine the rod insertion limits, AFD limits, and quadrant power tilt limits are not preserved.

Therefore, the limits may not preserve the design peaking factors, and FQ(Z) and FNH must be verified directly using incore power distribution measurements. Bases Section 3.2 (Power Distribution Limits) contains more complete discussions of the relation of FQ(Z) and FNH to the operating limits.

Shutdown and control rod OPERABILITY and alignment are directly related to power distributions and SDM, which are initial conditions assumed in safety analyses. Therefore they satisfy Criterion 2 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).

LCO The limits on shutdown or control rod alignments ensure that the assumptions in the safety analysis will remain valid. The requirements on OPERABILITY ensure that upon reactor trip, the assumed reactivity will be available and will be inserted. The control rod OPERABILITY requirements (i.e., trippability) also are separate from the alignment requirements, which ensure that the RCCAs and banks maintain the correct power distribution and rod alignment. The rod OPERABILITY requirement is satisfied provided the rod will fully insert in the required rod drop time assumed in the safety analysis. Rod control malfunctions that result in the inability to move a rod (e.g., rod lift coil failures), but that do not impact trippability, do not result in rod inoperability.

The requirement to maintain the rod alignment to within plus or minus 12 steps is conservative. The minimum misalignment assumed in safety analysis is 24 steps (15 inches), and in some cases a total misalignment from fully withdrawn to fully inserted is assumed.

Failure to meet the requirements of this LCO may produce unacceptable power peaking factors and LHRs, or unacceptable SDMs, all of which may constitute initial conditions inconsistent with the safety analysis.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-28 (continued)

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES (continued)

APPLICABILITY The requirements on RCCA OPERABILITY and alignment are applicable in MODES 1 and 2 because these are the only MODES in which neutron (or fission) power is generated, and the OPERABILITY (i.e., trippability) and alignment of rods have the potential to affect the safety of the plant.

In MODES 3, 4, 5, and 6, the alignment limits do not apply because the control rods are bottomed and the reactor is shut down and not producing fission power. In the shutdown MODES, the OPERABILITY of the shutdown and control rods has the potential to affect the required SDM, but this effect can be compensated for by an increase in the boron concentration of the RCS. See LCO 3.1.1, "SHUTDOWN MARGIN (SDM) - Tavg > 200°F," for SDM in MODES 3 and 4, LCO 3.1.2, "Shutdown Margin (SDM) - Tavg 200°F" for SDM in MODE 5, and LCO 3.9.1, "Boron Concentration," for boron concentration requirements during refueling.

ACTIONS A.1.1 and A.1.2 When one or more rods are untrippableinoperable (i.e., untrippable),

there is a possibility that the required SDM may be adversely affected.

Under these conditions, it is important to determine the SDM, and if it is less than the required value, initiate boration until the required SDM is recovered. The Completion Time of 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> is adequate for determining SDM and, if necessary, for initiating boration to restore SDM.

In this situation, SDM verification must include the worth of the untrippable rod, as well as a rod of maximum worth.

A.2 If the untrippable inoperable rod(s) cannot be restored to OPERABLE status, the plant must be brought to a MODE or condition in which the LCO requirements are not applicable. To achieve this status, the unit must be brought to at least MODE 3 within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />.

The allowed Completion Time is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching MODE 3 from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-29 Revision XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES ACTIONS B.1.1 and B.1.2 (continued)

When a rod becomes misaligned, it can usually be moved and is still trippable. If the rod can be realigned within the Completion Time of 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />, local xenon redistribution during this short interval will not be significant, and operation may proceed without further restriction.

An alternative to realigning a single misaligned RCCA to the group average position is to align the remainder of the group to the position of the misaligned RCCA. However, this must be done without violating the bank sequence, overlap, and insertion limits specified in LCO 3.1.6, "Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits," and LCO 3.1.7, "Control Bank Insertion Limits." The Completion Time of 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> gives the operator sufficient time to adjust the rod positions in an orderly manner.

B.2.1.1 and B.2.1.2 With a misaligned rod, SDM must be verified to be within limit or boration must be initiated to restore SDM to within limit.

In many cases, realigning the remainder of the group to the misaligned rod may not be desirable. For example, realigning control bank B to a rod that is misaligned 15 steps from the top of the core would require a significant power reduction, since control bank D must be moved fully in and control bank C must be moved in to approximately 100 to 115 steps.

Power operation may continue with one RCCA trippable but misaligned, provided that SDM is verified within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />. The Completion Time of 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> represents the time necessary for determining the actual unit SDM and, if necessary, aligning and starting the necessary systems and components to initiate boration.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-30 Revision XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES ACTIONS B.2.2, B.2.3, B.2.4, and B.2.5, and B.2.6 (continued)

For continued operation with a misaligned rod, RTP must be reduced, SDM must periodically be verified within limits, hot channel factors (FQ(Z) and FNH) must be verified within limits, and the safety analyses must be re-evaluated to confirm continued operation is permissible.

Reduction of power to 75% RTP ensures that local LHR increases due to a misaligned RCCA will not cause the core design criteria to be exceeded (Ref. 6). The Completion Time of 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> gives the operator sufficient time to accomplish an orderly power reduction without challenging the Reactor Protection System.

When a rod is known to be misaligned, there is a potential to impact the SDM. Since the core conditions can change with time, periodic verification of SDM is required. A Frequency of 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> is sufficient to ensure this requirement continues to be met.

Verifying that FQ(Z), as approximated by FCQ(Z) and FW Q(Z), and FNH are within the required limits ensures that current operation at 75% RTP with a rod misaligned is not resulting in power distributions that may invalidate safety analysis assumptions at full power. The Completion Time of 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> allows sufficient time to obtain an incore power distribution measurement and to calculate FQ(Z) and FNH.

Once current conditions have been verified acceptable, time is available to perform evaluations of accident analysis to determine that core limits will not be exceeded during a Design Basis Event for the duration of operation under these conditions. The accident analyses presented in UFSAR Chapter 15 (Ref. 3) that may be adversely affected will be evaluated to ensure that the analyses remain valid for the duration of continued operation under these conditions. A Completion Time of 5 days is sufficient time to obtain the required input data and to perform the analysis.

C.1 When Required Actions cannot be completed within their Completion Time, the unit must be brought to a MODE or Condition in which the LCO requirements are not applicable. To achieve this status, the unit must be brought to at least MODE 3 within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />, which obviates concerns about the development of undesirable xenon or power distributions. The allowed Completion Time of 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching MODE 3 from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging the plant systems.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-31 Revision XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES ACTIONS D.1.1 and D.1.2 (continued)

More than one control rod becoming misaligned from its group average position is not expected, and has the potential to reduce SDM. Therefore, SDM must be evaluated. One hour allows the operator adequate time to determine SDM. Restoration of the required SDM, if necessary, requires increasing the RCS boron concentration to provide negative reactivity, as described in the Bases of LCO 3.1.1. The required Completion Time of 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> for initiating boration is reasonable, based on the time required for potential xenon redistribution, the low probability of an accident occurring, and the steps required to complete the action. This allows the operator sufficient time to align the required valves and start the boric acid pumps.

Boration will continue until the required SDM is restored.

D.2 If more than one rod is found to be misaligned or becomes misaligned because of bank movement, the unit conditions fall outside of the accident analysis assumptions. Since automatic bank sequencing would continue to cause misalignment, the unit must be brought to a MODE or Condition in which the LCO requirements are not applicable.

To achieve this status, the unit must be brought to at least MODE 3 within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />. The allowed Completion Time is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching MODE 3 from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.

SURVEILLANCE SR 3.1.5.1 REQUIREMENTS Verification that the position of individual rods positions are is within alignment limits at a Frequency of 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> provides a history that allows the operator to detect a rod that is beginning to deviate from its expected position. If the rod position deviation monitor is inoperable, a Frequency of 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> accomplishes the same goal. The specified Frequency takes into account other rod position information that is continuously available to the operator in the control room, so that during actual rod motion, deviations can immediately be detected.

The SR is modified by a NOTE that permits it to not be performed for rods associated with an inoperable demand position indicator or an inoperable rod position indicator. The alignment limit is based on the demand position indicator which is not available if the indicator is inoperable. LCO 3.1.8, Rod Position Indication, provides Actions to verify the rods are in alignment when one or more rod positon indicators are inoperable.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-32 Revision XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES SURVEILLANCE SR 3.1.5.1 (continued)

REQUIREMENTS (continued) The Surveillance is modified by a Note which states that the SR is not required to be performed until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after associated rod motion. Control rod temperature affects the accuracy of the rod position indication system. Due to changes in the magnetic permeability of the drive shaft as a function of temperature, the indicated position is expected to change with time as the drive shaft temperature changes. The one hour period allows control rod temperature to stabilize following rod movement in order to ensure the indicated rod positon is accurate.

SR 3.1.5.2 Verifying each control rod is OPERABLE would require that each rod be tripped. However, in MODES 1 and 2, tripping each control rod would result in radial or axial power tilts, or oscillations. Exercising each individual control rod every 92 days provides increased confidence that all rods continue to be OPERABLE without exceeding the alignment limit, even if they are not regularly tripped. Moving each control rod by 10 steps will not cause radial or axial power tilts, or oscillations, to occur.

The 92 day Frequency takes into consideration other information available to the operator in the control room and SR 3.1.5.1, which is performed more frequently and adds to the determination of OPERABILITY of the rods. Between required performances of SR 3.1.5.2 (determination of control rod OPERABILITY by movement), if a control rod(s) is discovered to be immovable, but remains trippable and aligned, the control rod(s) is considered to be OPERABLE. At any time, if a control rod(s) is immovable, a determination of the trippability (OPERABILITY) of the control rod(s) must be made, and appropriate action taken.

SR 3.1.5.3 Verification of rod drop times allows the operator to determine that the maximum rod drop time permitted is consistent with the assumed rod drop time used in the safety analysis. Measuring rod drop times prior to reactor criticality after each, after initial fuel loading and reactor vessel head removal, ensures that the reactor internals and rod drive mechanism will not interfere with rod motion or rod drop time, and that no degradation in these systems has occurred that would adversely affect control rod motion or drop time. This testing is performed with all RCPs operating and the average moderator temperature 551°F to simulate a reactor trip under actual conditions.

This Surveillance is performed prior to initial criticality and during a plant outage, due to the plant conditions needed to perform the SR and the potential for an unplanned plant transient if the Surveillance were performed with the reactor at power.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-33 (continued)

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES (continued)

REFERENCES 1. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50, Appendix A, General Design Criterion 10, "Reactor Design," and General Design Criterion 26, "Reactivity Control System Redundancy and Capability."

2. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50.46, "Acceptance Criteria for Emergency Core Cooling Systems for Light Water Nuclear Power Reactors."
3. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.0, "Accident Analyses."
4. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.3, "Rod Cluster Control Assembly Misalignment."
5. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.2, "Major Secondary System Pipe Rupture."
6. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.3.6, "Single Rod Cluster Control Assembly Withdrawal at Full Power."

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-34

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.6 B 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS B 3.1.6 Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits BASES BACKGROUND The insertion limits of the shutdown and control rods are initial assumptions in all safety analyses that assume rod insertion upon reactor trip. The insertion limits directly affect core power and fuel burnup distributions and assumptions of available ejected rod worth, SDM and initial reactivity insertion rate.

The applicable criteria for these reactivity and power distribution design requirements are 10 CFR 50, Appendix A, GDC 10, "Reactor Design,"

GDC 26, "Reactivity Control System Redundancy and Capability," and GDC 28, "Reactivity Limits" (Ref. 1), and 10 CFR 50.46, "Acceptance Criteria for Emergency Core Cooling Systems for Light Water Nuclear Power Reactors" (Ref. 2). Limits on control rod insertion have been established, and all rod positions are monitored and controlled during power operation to ensure that the power distribution and reactivity limits defined by the design power peaking and SDM limits are preserved.

The rod cluster control assemblies (RCCAs) are divided among control banks and shutdown banks. Each bank may be further subdivided into two groups to provide for precise reactivity control (Shutdown Banks C and D have only one group each). A group consists of two or more RCCAs that are electrically paralleled to step simultaneously. Except for Shutdown Banks C and D, a bank of RCCAs consists of two groups that are moved in a staggered fashion, but always within one step of each other. There are four control banks and four shutdown banks. See LCO 3.1.5, "Rod Group Alignment Limits," for control and shutdown rod OPERABILITY and alignment requirements, and LCO 3.1.8, "Rod Position Indication," for position indication requirements.

The control banks are used for precise reactivity control of the reactor.

The positions of the control banks are normally automatically controlled by the Rod Control System, but they can also be manually controlled.

They are capable of adding negative reactivity very quickly (compared to borating). The control banks must be maintained above designed insertion limits and are typically near the fully withdrawn position during normal full power operations.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-35

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.6 BASES BACKGROUND Hence, they are not capable of adding a large amount of positive (continued) reactivity. Boration or dilution of the Reactor Coolant System (RCS) compensates for the reactivity changes associated with large changes in RCS temperature. The design calculations are performed with the assumption that the shutdown banks are withdrawn first. The shutdown banks are controlled manually by the control room operator. During normal unit operation, the shutdown banks are either fully withdrawn or fully inserted. The shutdown banks must be completely withdrawn from the core, prior to withdrawing any control banks during an approach to criticality. The shutdown banks can be fully withdrawn without the core going critical. This provides available negative reactivity in the event of boration errors. The shutdown banks are then left in this position until the reactor is shut down. They add negative reactivity to shut down the reactor upon receipt of a reactor trip signal.

APPLICABLE On a reactor trip, all RCCAs (shutdown banks and control banks), except SAFETY the most reactive RCCA, are assumed to insert into the core. The ANALYSES shutdown banks shall be at or above their insertion limits and available to insert the maximum amount of negative reactivity on a reactor trip signal.

The control banks may be partially inserted in the core, as allowed by LCO 3.1.7, "Control Bank Insertion Limits." The shutdown bank and control bank insertion limits are established to ensure that a sufficient amount of negative reactivity is available to shut down the reactor and maintain the required SDM (see LCO 3.1.1, "SHUTDOWN MARGIN (SDM) - Tavg > 200°F," and LCO 3.1.2, "SHUTDOWN MARGIN (SDM) -

Tavg 200°F") following a reactor trip from full power. The combination of control banks and shutdown banks (less the most reactive RCCA, which is assumed to be fully withdrawn) is sufficient to take the reactor from full power conditions at rated temperature to zero power, and to maintain the required SDM at rated no load temperature (Ref. 3). The shutdown bank insertion limit also limits the reactivity worth of an ejected shutdown rod.

The acceptance criteria for addressing shutdown and control rod bank insertion limits and inoperability or misalignment is that:

a. There be no violations of:
1. specified Specified acceptable fuel design limits, or
2. RCS pressure boundary integrity; and
b. The core remains subcritical after accident transients other than a main steam line break (MSLB).

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-36

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.6 BASES APPLICABLE As such, the shutdown bank insertion limits affect safety analysis SAFETY involving core reactivity and SDM (Ref. 3).

ANALYSES (continued) The shutdown bank insertion limits preserve an initial condition assumed in the safety analyses and, as such, satisfy Criterion 2 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).

LCO The shutdown banks must be within their insertion limits any time the reactor is critical or approaching criticality. This ensures that a sufficient amount of negative reactivity is available to shut down the reactor and maintain the required SDM following a reactor trip.

The shutdown bank insertion limits are defined in the COLR.

The LCO is modified by a Note indicating the LCO requirement is not applicable to shutdown banks being inserted while performing SR 3.1.5.2.

This SR verifies the freedom of the rods to move, and may require the shutdown bank to move below the LCO limits, which would normally violate the LCO. This Note applies to each shutdown bank as it is moved below the insertion limit to perform the SR. This Note is not applicable should a malfunction stop performance of the SR.

APPLICABILITY The shutdown banks must be within their insertion limits, with the reactor in MODES 1 and 2. The applicability in MODE 2 begins prior to initial control bank withdrawal, during an approach to criticality, and continues throughout MODE 2, until all control bank rods are again fully inserted by reactor trip or by shutdown. This ensures that a sufficient amount of negative reactivity is available to shut down the reactor and maintain the required SDM following a reactor trip. The shutdown banks do not have to be within their insertion limits in MODE 3, unless an approach to criticality is being made. Refer to LCO 3.1.1 and LCO 3.1.2 for SDM requirements in MODES 3, 4, and 5. LCO 3.9.1, "Boron Concentration,"

ensures adequate SDM in MODE 6.

The Applicability requirements have been modified by a Note indicating the LCO requirement is suspended during SR 3.1.5.2. This SR verifies the freedom of the rods to move, and requires the shutdown bank to move below the LCO limits, which would normally violate the LCO.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-37

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.6 BASES ACTIONS A.1, A.2.1, A.2.2, and A.3 If one shutdown bank is inserted less than or equal to 10 steps below the insertion limit, 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> is allowed to restore the shutdown bank to within the limit. This is necessary because the available SDM may be reduced with a shutdown bank not within its insertion limit. Also, verification of SDM or initiation of boration within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> is required, since the SDM in MODES 1 and 2 is ensured by adhering to the control and shutdown bank insertion limits (see LCO 3.1.1). If a shutdown bank is not within its insertion limit, SDM will be verified by performing a reactivity balance calculation, considering the effects listed in the BASES for SR 3.1.1.1.

While the shutdown bank is outside the insertion limit, all control banks must be within their insertion limits to ensure sufficient shutdown margin is available. The 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> Completion Time is sufficient to repair most rod control failures that would prevent movement of a shutdown bank.

AB.1.1, AB.1.2 and AB.2 When one or more shutdown banks is not within insertion limits for reasons other than Condition A, 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> is allowed to restore the shutdown banks to within the insertion limits. This is necessary because the available SDM may be significantly reduced, with one or more of the shutdown banks not within their insertion limits. Also, verification of SDM or initiation of boration within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> is required, since the SDM in MODES 1 and 2 is ensured by adhering to the control and shutdown bank insertion limits (See LCO 3.1.1.). If shutdown banks are not within their insertion limits, then SDM will be verified by performing a reactivity balance calculation, considering the effects listed in the Bases for SR 3.1.1.1.

The allowed Completion Time of 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> provides an acceptable time for evaluating and repairing minor problems without allowing the plant to remain in an unacceptable condition for an extended period of time.

BC.1 If the shutdown banks cannot be restored to within their insertion limits within 2 hour2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br />sRequired Actions and associated Completion Times are not met, the unit must be brought to a MODE where the LCO is not applicable. The allowed Completion Time of 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching the required MODE from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-38

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.6 BASES SURVEILLANCE SR 3.1.6.1 REQUIREMENTS Verification that the shutdown banks are within their insertion limits prior to an approach to criticality ensures that when the reactor is critical, or being taken critical, the shutdown banks will be available to shut down the reactor, and the required SDM will be maintained following a reactor trip.

This SR and Frequency ensure that the shutdown banks are withdrawn before the control banks are withdrawn during a unit startup.

The Surveillance is modified by a Note which states that the SR is not required to be performed for shutdown banks until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after motion of rods in those banks. Rod temperature affects the accuracy of the rod position indication system. Due to changes in the magnetic permeability of the drive shaft as a function of temperature, the indicated position is expected to change with time as the drive shaft temperature changes.

The one hour period allows rod temperature to stabilize following rod movement in order to ensure the indicated position is accurate.

Since the shutdown banks are positioned manually by the control room operator, a verification of shutdown bank position at a Frequency of 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />, after the reactor is taken critical, is adequate to ensure that they are within their insertion limits. Also, the 12-hour Frequency takes into account other information available in the control room for the purpose of monitoring the status of shutdown rods.

REFERENCES 1. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50, Appendix A, General Design Criterion 10, "Reactor Design," General Design Criterion 26, "Reactivity Control System Redundancy and Capability," and General Design Criterion 28, "Reactivity Limits."

2. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50.46, "Acceptance Criteria for Emergency Core Cooling Systems for Light Water Nuclear Power Reactors."
3. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.0, "Accident Analyses."

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-39

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 B 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS B 3.1.7 Control Bank Insertion Limits BASES BACKGROUND The insertion limits of the shutdown and control rods are initial assumptions in all safety analyses that assume rod insertion upon reactor trip. The insertion limits directly affect core power and fuel burnup distributions and assumptions of available ejected rod worth, SDM, and initial reactivity insertion rate.

The applicable criteria for these reactivity and power distribution design requirements are 10 CFR 50, Appendix A, GDC 10, "Reactor Design,"

GDC 26, "Reactivity Control System Redundancy and Capability," and GDC 28, "Reactivity Limits" (Ref. 1), and 10 CFR 50.46, "Acceptance Criteria for Emergency Core Cooling Systems for Light Water Nuclear Power Reactors" (Ref. 2). Limits on control rod insertion have been established, and all rod positions are monitored and controlled during power operation to ensure that the power distribution and reactivity limits defined by the design power peaking and SDM limits are preserved.

The rod cluster control assemblies (RCCAs) are divided among control banks and shutdown banks. Each bank may be further subdivided into two groups to provide for precise reactivity control (Shutdown Banks C and D have only one group each). A group consists of two or more RCCAs that are electrically paralleled to step simultaneously. Except for Shutdown Banks C and D, a bank of RCCAs consists of two groups that are moved in a staggered fashion, but always within one step of each other. There are four control banks and four shutdown banks. See LCO 3.1.5, "Rod Group Alignment Limits," for control and shutdown rod OPERABILITY and alignment requirements, and LCO 3.1.8, "Rod Position Indication," for position indication requirements.

The control bank insertion limits are specified in the COLR. An example is provided for information only in Figure B 3.1.7-1. The control banks are required to be at or above the insertion limit lines.

Figure B 3.1.7-1 also indicates how the control banks are moved in an overlap pattern. Overlap is the distance traveled together by two control banks. The predetermined position of control bank C, at which control bank D will begin to move with bank C on a withdrawal, as an example may be at 128 steps. Therefore, in this example, control bank C overlaps control bank D from 128 steps to the fully withdrawn position for control bank C. The fully withdrawn position and predetermined overlap positions are defined in the COLR.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-40

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES BACKGROUND The control banks are used for precise reactivity control of the reactor.

(continued) The positions of the control banks are normally controlled automatically by the Rod Control System, but can also be manually controlled. They are capable of adding reactivity very quickly (compared to borating or diluting).

The power density at any point in the core must be limited, so that the fuel design criteria are maintained. Together, LCO 3.1.5, Rod Group Alignment Limits, LCO 3.1.6, "Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits,"

LCO 3.1.7, Control Bank Insertion Limits, LCO 3.2.3, "AXIAL FLUX DIFFERENCE (AFD)," and LCO 3.2.4, "QUADRANT POWER TILT RATIO (QPTR)," provide limits on control component operation and on monitored process variables, which ensure that the core operates within the fuel design criteria.

The shutdown and control bank insertion and alignment limits, AFD, and QPTR are process variables that together characterize and control the three dimensional power distribution of the reactor core. Additionally, the control bank insertion limits control the reactivity that could be added in the event of a rod ejection accident, and the shutdown and control bank insertion limits ensure the required SDM is maintained.

Operation within the subject LCO limits will prevent fuel cladding failures that would breach the primary fission product barrier and release fission products to the reactor coolant in the event of a loss of coolant accident (LOCA), loss of flow, ejected rod, or other accident requiring termination by a Reactor Trip System (RTS) trip function.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-41 (continued)

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES (continued)

APPLICABLE The shutdown and control bank insertion limits, AFD, and QPTR LCOs SAFETY are required to prevent power distributions that could result in fuel ANALYSES cladding failures in the event of a LOCA, loss of flow, ejected rod, or other accident requiring termination by an RTS trip function.

The acceptance criteria for addressing shutdown and control bank insertion limits and inoperability or misalignment are that:

a. There be no violations of:
1. specified Specified acceptable fuel design limits, or
2. Reactor Coolant System pressure boundary integrity; and
b. The core remains subcritical after accident transients other than a main steam line break (MSLB).

As such, the shutdown and control bank insertion limits affect safety analysis involving core reactivity and power distributions (Ref. 3 through 13).

The SDM requirement is ensured by limiting the control and shutdown bank insertion limits so that allowable inserted worth of the RCCAs is such that sufficient reactivity is available in the rods to shut down the reactor to hot zero power with a reactivity margin that assumes the maximum worth RCCA remains fully withdrawn upon trip (Ref. 5, 6, 8 and 11).

Operation at the insertion limits or AFD limits may approach the maximum allowable linear heat generation rate or peaking factor with the allowed QPTR present. Operation at the insertion limit may also indicate the maximum ejected RCCA worth could be equal to the limiting value in fuel cycles that have sufficiently high ejected RCCA worths.

The control and shutdown bank insertion limits ensure that safety analyses assumptions for SDM, ejected rod worth, and power distribution peaking factors are preserved (Ref. 3 through 13).

The insertion limits satisfy Criterion 2 of 10CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), in that they are initial conditions assumed in the safety analysis.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-42 (continued)

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES (continued)

LCO The limits on control banks sequence, overlap, and physical insertion, as defined in the COLR, must be maintained because they serve the function of preserving power distribution, ensuring that the SDM is maintained, ensuring that ejected rod worth is maintained, and ensuring adequate negative reactivity insertion is available on trip. The overlap between control banks provides more uniform rates of reactivity insertion and withdrawal and is imposed to maintain acceptable power peaking during control bank motion.

The LCO is modified by a Note indicating the LCO requirement is not applicable to control banks being inserted while performing SR 3.1.5.2.

This SR verifies the freedom of the rods to move, and may require the control bank to move below the LCO limits, which would normally violate the LCO. This Note applies to each control bank as it is moved below the insertion limit to perform the SR. This Note is not applicable should a malfunction stop performance of the SR.

APPLICABILITY The control bank sequence, overlap, and physical insertion limits shall be maintained with the reactor in MODES 1 and 2 with keff 1.0. These limits must be maintained, since they preserve the assumed power distribution, ejected rod worth, SDM, and reactivity rate insertion assumptions. Applicability in MODES 3, 4, and 5 is not required, since neither the power distribution nor ejected rod worth assumptions would be exceeded in these MODES.

ACTIONS A.1, A.2.1, A.2.2, and A.3 If Control Bank A, B, or C is inserted less than or equal to 10 steps below the insertion, sequence, or overlap limits, 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> is allowed to restore the control bank to within the limits. Verification of SDM or initiation of boration within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> is required, since the SDM in MODES 1 and 2 is ensured by adhering to the control and shutdown bank insertion limits (see LCO 3.1.1). If a control bank is not within its insertion limit, SDM will be verified by performing a reactivity balance calculation, considering the effects listed in the BASES for SR 3.1.1.1.

While the control bank is outside the insertion, sequence, or overlap limits, all shutdown banks must be within their insertion limits to ensure sufficient shutdown margin is available and that power distribution is controlled. The 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> Completion Time is sufficient to repair most rod control failures that would prevent movement of a shutdown bank.

Condition A is limited to Control Banks A, B, or C. The allowance is not required for Control Bank D because the full power bank insertion limit can be met during performance of the SR 3.1.5.2 control rod freedom of movement (trippability) testing.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-43 (continued)

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES (continued)

ACTIONS AB.1.1, AB.1.2, AB.2, BC.1.1, BC.1.2, and BC.2 (continued)

When the control banks are outside the acceptable insertion limits for reasons other than Condition A, they must be restored to within those limits. This restoration can occur in two ways:

a. Reducing power to be consistent with rod position; or
b. Moving rods to be consistent with power.

Also, verification of SDM or initiation of boration to regain SDM is required within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />, since the SDM in MODES 1 and 2 normally ensured by adhering to the control and shutdown bank insertion limits (see LCO 3.1.1, "SHUTDOWN MARGIN (SDM) - Tavg > 200°F") has been upset. If control banks are not within their insertion limits, then SDM will be verified by performing a reactivity balance calculation, considering the effects listed in the Bases for SR 3.1.1.1.

Similarly, if the control banks are found to be out of sequence or in the wrong overlap configuration for reasons other than Condition A, they must be restored to meet the limits.

Operation beyond the LCO limits is allowed for a short time period in order to take conservative action because the simultaneous occurrence of either a LOCA, loss of flow accident, ejected rod accident, or other accident during this short time period, together with an inadequate power distribution or reactivity capability, has an acceptably low probability.

The allowed Completion Time of 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> for restoring the banks to within the insertion, sequence, and overlap limits provides an acceptable time for evaluating and repairing minor problems without allowing the plant to remain in an unacceptable condition for an extended period of time.

CD.1 If the Required Actions A.1 and A.2, or B.1 and B.2 cannot be completed within the associated Completion Times, the plant must be brought to MODE 32 with keff < 1.0, where the LCO is not applicable. The allowed Completion Time of 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching the required MODE from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-44 (continued)

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES (continued)

SURVEILLANCE SR 3.1.7.1 REQUIREMENTS This Surveillance is required to ensure that the reactor does not achieve criticality with the control banks below their insertion limits.

The estimated critical position (ECP) depends upon a number of factors, one of which is xenon concentration. If the ECP was calculated long before criticality, xenon concentration could change to make the ECP substantially in error. Conversely, determining the ECP immediately before criticality could be an unnecessary burden. There are a number of unit parameters requiring operator attention at that point. Performing the ECP calculation within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> prior to criticality avoids a large error from changes in xenon concentration, but allows the operator some flexibility to schedule the ECP calculation with other startup activities.

SR 3.1.7.2 With an OPERABLE bank insertion limit monitor, verification of the control bank insertion limits at a Frequency of 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> is sufficient to ensure OPERABILITY of the bank insertion limit monitor and to detect control banks that may be approaching the insertion limits since, normally, very little rod motion occurs in 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />. If the insertion limit monitor becomes inoperable, verification of the control bank position at a Frequency of 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> is sufficient to detect control banks that may be approaching the insertion limits.

The Surveillance is modified by a Note stating that the SR is not required to be performed for control banks until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after motion of rods in those banks. Control rod temperature affects the accuracy of the rod position indication system. Due to changes in the magnetic permeability of the drive shaft as a function of temperature, the indicated position is expected to change with time as the drive shaft temperature changes. The one hour period allows control rod temperature to stabilize following rod movement in order to ensure the indicated rod position is accurate.

SR 3.1.7.3 When control banks are maintained within their insertion limits as checked by SR 3.1.7.2 above, it is unlikely that their sequence and overlap will not be in accordance with requirements provided in the COLR.

A Frequency of 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> is consistent with the insertion limit check above in SR 3.1.7.2.The Surveillance is modified by a Note stating that the SR is not required to be performed for control banks until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after motion of rods in those banks. Control rod temperature affects the accuracy of the rod position indication system. Due to changes in the magnetic permeability of the drive shaft as a function of temperature, the indicated position is expected to change with time as the drive shaft temperature Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-45 (continued)

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES (continued)

SURVEILLANCE SR 3.1.7.3 (continued0 REQUIREMENTS (continued) following rod movement in order to ensure the indicated rod position is accurate.

A Frequency of 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> is consistent with the insertion limit check above in SR 3.1.7.2.

REFERENCES 1. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50, Appendix A, General Design Criterion 10, "Reactor Design," General Design Criterion 26, "Reactivity Control System Redundancy and Capability," and General Design Criterion 28, "Reactivity Limits."

2. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50.46, "Acceptance Criteria for Emergency Core Cooling Systems for Light Water Nuclear Power Reactors."
3. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.1, "Uncontrolled Rod Cluster Control Assembly Bank Withdrawal From a Subcritical Condition."
4. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.2, "Uncontrolled Rod Cluster Control Assembly Bank Withdrawal At Power."
5. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.3, "Rod Cluster Control Assembly Misalignment."
6. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.4, "Uncontrolled Boron Dilution."
7. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.5, "Partial Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow."
8. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.13, "Accidental Depressurization of the Main Steam System."
9. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.3.4, "Complete Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow."
10. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.3.6, "Single Rod Cluster Control Assembly Withdrawal At Full Power."
11. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.2.1, "Major Rupture of Main Steam Line."
12. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.4, "Single Reactor Coolant Pump Locked Rotor."
13. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.6, "Rupture of a Control Rod Drive Mechanism Housing (Rod Cluster Control Assembly Ejection)."

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-46

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-47

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 B 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS B 3.1.8 Rod Position Indication BASES BACKGROUND According to GDC 13 (Ref. 1), instrumentation to monitor variables and systems over their operating ranges during normal operation, anticipated operational occurrences, and accident conditions must be OPERABLE.

LCO 3.1.8 is required to ensure OPERABILITY of the control rod position indicators to determine control rod positions and thereby ensure compliance with the control rod alignment and insertion limits.

The OPERABILITY, including position indication, of the shutdown and control rods is an initial assumption in all safety analyses that assume rod insertion upon reactor trip. Maximum rod misalignment is an initial assumption in the safety analysis that directly affects core power distributions and assumptions of available SDM. Rod position indication is required to assess OPERABILITY and misalignment.

Mechanical or electrical failures may cause a control rod to become inoperable or to become misaligned from its group. Control rod inoperability or misalignment may cause increased power peaking, due to the asymmetric reactivity distribution and a reduction in the total available rod worth for reactor shutdown. Therefore, control rod alignment and OPERABILITY are related to core operation in design power peaking limits and the core design requirement of a minimum SDM.

Limits on control rod alignment and OPERABILITY have been established, and all rod positions are monitored and controlled during power operation to ensure that the power distribution and reactivity limits defined by the design power peaking and SDM limits are preserved.

Rod cluster control assemblies (RCCAs), or rods, are moved out of the core (up or withdrawn) or into the core (down or inserted) by their control rod drive mechanisms. The RCCAs are divided among control banks and shutdown banks. Each bank may be further subdivided into two groups to provide for precise reactivity control (Shutdown Banks C and D have only one group each).

The axial position of shutdown rods and control rods are determined by two separate and independent systems: the Bank Demand Position Indication System (commonly called group step counters) and the analog Rod Position Indication (RPI) System.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-48

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES BACKGROUND The Bank Demand Position Indication System counts the pulses from the (continued) Rod Control System that move the rods. There is one step counter for each group of rods. Individual rods in a group all receive the same signal to move and should, therefore, all be at the same position indicated by the group step counter for that group. The Bank Demand Position Indication System is considered highly precise (+/- 1 step or +/- 5/8 inch). If a rod does not move one step for each demand pulse, the step counter will still count the pulse and incorrectly reflect the position of the rod.

The RPI System provides an accurate indication of actual control rod position, but at a lower precision than the step counters. This system is based on inductive analog signals from a series of coils spaced along a hollow tube with a center-to-center distance of 3.75 inches, which is 6 steps. The normal indication accuracy of the RPI System is +/- 6 steps

(+/- 3.75 inches), and the maximum uncertainty is +/- 12 steps

(+/- 7.5 inches). With an indicated deviation of 12 steps between the group step counter and RPI, the maximum deviation between actual rod position and the demand position could be 24 steps, or 15 inches.

The Power Distribution Monitoring System (PDMS) as controlled by Technical Requirements Manual Section 3.3.3 9 develops a detailed three dimensional power distribution via its nodal code coupled with updates from plant instrumentation, including the fixed incore detectors.

The monitored power distribution is compared to the reference power distribution corresponding to all control rods properly aligned. Agreement between the two power distributions can be used to indirectly verify the control rod is aligned.

APPLICABLE Control and shutdown rod position accuracy is essential during power SAFETY operation. Power peaking, ejected rod worth, or SDM limits may be ANALYSES violated in the event of a Design Basis Accident (Ref. 2 through 12), with control or shutdown rods operating outside their limits undetected.

Therefore, the acceptance criteria for rod position indication is that rod positions must be known with sufficient accuracy in order to verify the core is operating within the group sequence, overlap, design peaking limits, ejected rod worth, and with minimum SDM (LCO 3.1.6, "Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits," and LCO 3.1.7, "Control Bank Insertion Limits").

The rod positions must also be known in order to verify the alignment limits are preserved (LCO 3.1.5, "Rod Group Alignment Limits"). Control rod positions are continuously monitored to provide operators with information that ensures the plant is operating within the bounds of the accident analysis assumptions.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-49

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES (continued)

APPLICABLE The control rod position indicator channels satisfy Criterion 2 of 10 CFR SAFETY 50.36(c)(2)(ii). The control rod position indicators monitor control rod ANALYSES position, which is an initial condition of the accident.

(continued)

LCO LCO 3.1.8 specifies that the RPI System and the Bank Demand Position Indication System be OPERABLE for all control rods. For the control rod position indicators to be OPERABLE requires meeting the SR of the LCO (when required) and the following:

a. The RPI System indicates within 12 steps of the group step counter demand position as required by LCO 3.1.5, "Rod Group Alignment Limits;"
b. For the RPI System there are no failed coils; and
c. The Bank Demand Indication System has been calibrated either in the fully inserted position or to the RPI System.

The SR of the LCO is modified by a Note which states it is not required to be met for RPIs associated with rods that do not meet LCO 3.1.5. If a rod is known to not be within 12 steps of the group demand position, the Actions of LCO 3.1.5 provide appropriate Actions. Otherwise, The the 12 step agreement limit between the Bank Demand Position Indication System and the RPI System indicates that the Bank Demand Position Indication System is adequately calibrated, and can be used for indication of the measurement of control rod bank position.

A deviation of less than the allowable limit, given in LCO 3.1.5, in position indication for a single control rod, ensures high confidence that the position uncertainty of the corresponding control rod group is within the assumed values used in the analysis (that specified control rod group insertion limits).

These requirements ensure that control rod position indication during power operation and PHYSICS TESTS is accurate, and that design assumptions are not challenged. OPERABILITY of the position indicator channels ensures that inoperable, misaligned, or mispositioned control rods can be detected. Therefore, power peaking, ejected rod worth, and SDM can be controlled within acceptable limits.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-50

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES (continued)

LCO (continued) The LCO is modified by a Note stating that the RPI system is not required to be OPERABLE for 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> following movement of the associated rods.

Control and shutdown rod temperature affects the accuracy of the RPI System. Due to changes in the magnetic permeability of the drive shaft as a function of temperature, the indicated position is expected to change with time as the drive shaft temperature changes. The one hour period allows temperature to stabilize following rod movement in order to ensure the indicated positon is accurate.

APPLICABILITY The requirements on the RPI and step counters are only applicable in MODES 1 and 2 (consistent with LCO 3.1.5, LCO 3.1.6, and LCO 3.1.7),

because these are the only MODES in which power is generated, and the OPERABILITY and alignment of rods have the potential to affect the safety of the plant. In the shutdown MODES, the OPERABILITY of the shutdown and control banks has the potential to affect the required SDM, but this effect can be compensated for by an increase in the boron concentration of the Reactor Coolant System.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-51

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES (continued)

ACTIONS The ACTIONS table is modified by a Note indicating that a separate Condition entry is allowed for each inoperable rod position indicator per group and each demand position indicator per bank. This is acceptable because the Required Actions for each Condition provide appropriate compensatory actions for each inoperable position indicator.

A.1, A.2.1, and A.2.2 When one RPI channel per group in one or more group fails, the position of the rod can still be determined indirectly by use of incore power distribution measurement information. Incore power distribution measurement information is obtained from an OPERABLE Power Distribution Monitoring System (PDMS) (Ref. 15). The Required Action may also be satisfied by ensuring at least once per 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> that FQ satisfies LCO 3.2.1, FNH satisfies LCO 3.2.2, and SHUTDOWN MARGIN is within the limits provided in the COLR, provided the non-indicating rods have not been moved. Based on experience, normal power operation does not require excessive movement of banks. If a bank has been significantly moved, the Required Action of BC.1 or BC.2 below is required. Therefore, verification of rod position within the Completion Time of 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> is adequate for allowing continued full power operation, since the probability of simultaneously having a rod significantly out of position and an event sensitive to that rod position is small.

Required Action A.1 requires verification of a rod with an inoperable RPI once per 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br />. Required Action A.2.1 provides an alternative.

Required Action A.2.1 requires verification of rod position using power distribution measurement information every 31 EFPD, which coincides with the normal measurements to verify core power distribution.

Required Action A.2.1 includes six distinct requirements for verification of the position of rods associated with an inoperable RPI using incore power distribution measurement information:

a. Initial verification within 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> of the inoperability of the RPI;
b. Re-verification once every 31 Effective Full Power Days (EFPD) thereafter;
c. Verification within 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> if rod control system parameters indicate unintended rod movement. An unintended rod movement is defined as the release of the rods stationary gripper when no action was demanded either manually or automatically from the rod control system, or a rod motion in a direction other than the direction demanded by the rod control system. Verifying that no unintended rod movement has occurred is performed by monitoring the rod control system stationary gripper coil current for indications of rod movement; (continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-52

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES (continued)

ACTIONS A.1, A.2.1, and A.2.2 (continued)

d. Verification within 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> if the rod with an inoperable RPI is intentionally moved greater than 12 steps;
e. Verification prior to exceeding 50% RTP if power is reduced below 50% RTP; and
f. Verification within 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> of reaching 100% RTP if power is reduced to less than 100% power RTP.

Should the rod with the inoperable RPI be moved more than 12 steps, or if reactor power is changed, the position of the rod with the inoperable RPI must be verified.

Required Action A.2.2 states that the inoperable RPI must be restored to OPERABLE status prior to entering MODE 2 from MODE 3. The repair of the inoperable RPI must be performed prior to returning to power operation following a shutdown.

A.2.1, A.2.2 The control rod drive mechanism (a portion of the rod control system) consists of four separate subassemblies; 1) the pressure vessel, 2) the coil stack assembly, 3) the latch assembly, and 4) the drive rod assembly.

The coil stack assembly contains three operating coils; 1) the stationary gripper coil, 2) the moveable gripper coil, and 3) the lift coil. In support of Actions A.2.1 and A.2.2, a Temporary Alteration (TA) to the configuration of the plant is implemented to provide instrumentation for the monitoring of the rod control system parameters in the Main Control Room. The TA creates a circuit that monitors the operation and timing of the lift coil and the stationary gripper coil. Additional details regarding the TA are provided in the FSAR (Ref. 14).

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-53

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES ACTIONS A.3 (continued)

Reduction of THERMAL POWER to 50% RTP puts core into a condition where rod position is not significantly affecting core peaking factors (Ref. 4). Required Action A.3 applies whenever the TA is not utilized or the position of the rod with an inoperable RPI cannot be verified indirectly. The discussion for Required Action A.2.3 (above) clarified that a reduction of THERMAL POWER to less than or equal to 50% RTP puts the core into a condition where rod position is not significantly affecting core peaking factors (Ref. 13). The allowed Completion Time of 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reducing power to less than or equal to 50% RTP from full power conditions without challenging plant systems and allowing for rod position determination by Required Action A.1 above.

Consistent with LCO 3.0.4 and this action, unit startup and operation to less than or equal to 50% RTP may occur with one RPI per group inoperable. Thermal Power may be escalated to 100% RTP as long as Required Action A.1 is satisfied.

B.1 and B.2 When more than one RPI per group in one or more groups fail, additional actions are necessary. Placing the Rod Control System in manual assures unplanned rod motion will not occur. The immediate Completion Time for placing the Rod Control System in manual reflects the urgency with which unplanned rod motion must be prevented while in this Condition.

The inoperable RPIs must be restored, such that a maximum of one RPI per group is inoperable, within 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />. The 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> Completion Time provides sufficient time to troubleshoot and restore the RPI system to operation while avoiding the plant challenges associated with the shutdown without full rod position indication.

Based on operating experience, normal power operation does not require excessive rod movement. If one or more rods has been significantly moved, the Required Action of C.1 or C.2 below is required.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-54

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES ACTIONS BC.1 and BC.2 (continued)

With one or more RPI inoperable in one or more groups and the affected groups have moved greater than 24 steps in one direction since the last determination of rod position, additional actions are needed to verify the position of rods with inoperable RPI. Within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />, the position of the rods with inoperable position indication must be determined using the PDMS to verify These Required Actions clarify that when one or more rods with inoperable position indicators have been moved in excess of 24 steps in one direction, since the position was last determined, the Required Actions of A.1 and A.2 are still appropriate but must be initiated promptly under Required Action B.1 to begin verifying that these rods are still properly positioned, relative to their group positions.

If, within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />, the rod positions have not been verified, THERMAL POWER must be reduced to less than or equal to 50% RTP within 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> to avoid undesirable power distributions that could result from continued operation at greater than 50% RTP, if one or more rods are misaligned by more than 24 steps. The allowed Completion Time of 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> provides an acceptable period of time to verify the rod positions.

CD.1.1 and CD.1.2 With one or more demand position indicators per bank inoperable in one or more banks, the rod positions can be determined by the RPI System.

Since normal power operation does not require excessive movement of rods, verification by administrative means that the rod position indicators are OPERABLE and the most withdrawn rod and the least withdrawn rod are less than or equal to 12 steps apart within the allowed Completion Time of once every 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> is adequate.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-55

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES ACTIONS CD.2 (continued)

Reduction of THERMAL POWER to less than or equal to 50% RTP puts the core into a condition where rod position is not significantly affecting core peaking factor limits (Ref. 13). The allowed Completion Time of 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> provides an acceptable period of time to verify the rod positions per Required Actions CD.1.1 and CD.1.2 or reduce power to less than or equal to 50% RTP.

DE.1 If the Required Actions cannot be completed within the associated Completion Time, the plant must be brought to a MODE in which the requirement does not apply. To achieve this status, the plant must be brought to at least MODE 3 within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />. The allowed Completion Time is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching the required MODE from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.

SURVEILLANCE SR 3.1.8.1 REQUIREMENTS Verification that the RPI agrees with the demand position within 12 steps ensures that the RPI is operating correctly.

This Surveillance is performed prior to reactor criticality after each removal of the reactor head, as there is The 18-month Frequency is based on the need to perform this Surveillance under the conditions that apply during a plant outage and the potential for unnecessary plant transients if the SR were performed with the reactor at power. Operating experience has shown these components usually pass the SR when performed at a Frequency of once every 18 months. Therefore, the Frequency was concluded to be acceptable from a reliability standpoint.

The Surveillance is modified by a Note which states it is not required to be met for RPIs associated with rods that do not meet LCO 3.1.5. If a rod is known to not be within 12 steps of the group demand position, the ACTIONS of LCO 3.1.5 provide the appropriate Actions.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-56 (continued)

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES (continued)

REFERENCES 1. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50, Appendix A, General Design Criterion 13, "Instrumentation and Control."

2. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.1, "Uncontrolled Rod Cluster Control Assembly Bank Withdrawal From a Subcritical Condition."
3. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.2, "Uncontrolled Rod Cluster Control Assembly Bank Withdrawal At Power."
4. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.3, "Rod Cluster Control Assembly Misalignment."
5. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.4, "Uncontrolled Boron Dilution."
6. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.5, "Partial Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow."
7. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.13, "Accidental Depressurization of the Main Steam System."
8. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.3.4, "Complete Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow."
9. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.3.6, "Single Rod Cluster Control Assembly Withdrawal At Full Power."
10. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.2.1, "Major Rupture of Main Steam Line."
11. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.4, "Single Reactor Coolant Pump Locked Rotor."
12. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.6, "Rupture of a Control Rod Drive Mechanism Housing (Rod Cluster Control Assembly Ejection)."
13. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 4.3, "Nuclear Design."
14. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 7.7.1.3.2, Main Control Room Rod Position Indication.
15. WCAP-12472-P-A, BEACON' Core Monitoring and Operations Support System, August 1994 (Addendum 2, April 2002).

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-56a

Enclosure 7 Proposed Technical Specification Bases Changes (Final Typed) for WBN Unit 1 (For Information Only)

CNL-17-123

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 B 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS B 3.1.5 Rod Group Alignment Limits BASES BACKGROUND The OPERABILITY (i.e., trippability) of the shutdown and control rods is an initial assumption in all safety analyses that assume rod insertion upon reactor trip.

Maximum rod misalignment is an initial assumption in the safety analysis that directly affects core power distributions and assumptions of available SDM.

The applicable criteria for these reactivity and power distribution design requirements are 10 CFR 50, Appendix A, GDC 10, "Reactor Design," and GDC 26, "Reactivity Control System Redundancy and Capability," (Ref. 1), and 10 CFR 50.46, "Acceptance Criteria for Emergency Core Cooling Systems for Light Water Nuclear Power Reactors" (Ref. 2).

Mechanical or electrical failures may cause a control or shutdown rod to become inoperable or to become misaligned from its group. Rod inoperability or misalignment may cause increased power peaking, due to the asymmetric reactivity distribution and a reduction in the total available rod worth for reactor shutdown. Therefore, rod alignment and OPERABILITY are related to core operation in design power peaking limits and the core design requirement of a minimum SDM.

Limits on rod alignment have been established, and all rod positions are monitored and controlled during power operation to ensure that the power distribution and reactivity limits defined by the design power peaking and SDM limits are preserved.

Rod cluster control assemblies (RCCAs), or rods, are moved by their control rod drive mechanisms (CRDMs). Each CRDM moves its RCCA one step (approximately 5/8 inch) at a time, but at varying rates (steps per minute) depending on the signal output from the Rod Control System.

The RCCAs are divided among control banks and shutdown banks. Each bank may be further subdivided into two groups to provide for precise reactivity control (Shutdown Banks C and D have only one group each). A group consists (continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-24 Revision 51, XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES BACKGROUND of two or more RCCAs that are electrically paralleled to step simultaneously.

(continued) Except for Shutdown Banks C and D, a bank of RCCAs consists of two groups that are moved in a staggered fashion, but always within one step of each other.

There are four control banks and four shutdown banks.

The shutdown banks are maintained either in the fully inserted or fully withdrawn position. The control banks are moved in an overlap pattern, using the following withdrawal sequence: When control bank A reaches a predetermined height in the core, control bank B begins to move out with control bank A. Control bank A stops at the position of maximum withdrawal, and control bank B continues to move out. When control bank B reaches a predetermined height, control bank C begins to move out with control bank B. This sequence continues until control banks A, B, and C are at the fully withdrawn position, and control bank D is approximately halfway withdrawn. The insertion sequence is the opposite of the withdrawal sequence. The control rods are arranged in a radially symmetric pattern, so that control bank motion does not introduce radial asymmetries in the core power distributions.

The axial position of shutdown rods and control rods is indicated by two separate and independent systems, which are the Bank Demand Position Indication System (commonly called group step counters) and the Rod Position Indication (RPI) System.

The Bank Demand Position Indication System counts the pulses from the rod control system that moves the rods. There is one step counter for each group of rods. Individual rods in a group all receive the same signal to move and should, therefore, all be at the same position indicated by the group step counter for that group. The Bank Demand Position Indication System is considered highly precise (+/- 1 step or +/- 5/8 inch). If a rod does not move one step for each demand pulse, the step counter will still count the pulse and incorrectly reflect the position of the rod.

The RPI System provides an accurate indication of actual control rod position, but at a lower precision than the step counters. This system is based on inductive analog signals from a series of coils spaced along a hollow tube with a center to center distance of 3.75 inches, which is six steps. The normal (continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-25 Revision 51, XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES BACKGROUND indication accuracy of the RPI System is +/- 6 steps (+/- 3.75 inches),

(continued) and the maximum uncertainty is +/- 12 steps (+/- 7.5 inches). With an indicated deviation of 12 steps between the group step counter and RPI, the maximum deviation between actual rod position and the demand position could be 24 steps, or 15 inches.

APPLICABLE Control rod misalignment accidents are analyzed in the safety analysis SAFETY ANALYSES (Ref. 3). The acceptance criteria for addressing control rod inoperability or misalignment are that:

a. There be no violations of:
1. Specified acceptable fuel design limits, or
2. Reactor Coolant System (RCS) pressure boundary integrity; and
b. The core remains subcritical after accident transients other than a main steam line break (MSLB).

Two types of misalignment are distinguished. During movement of a control rod group, one rod may stop moving, while the other rods in the group continue. This condition may cause excessive power peaking. The second type of misalignment occurs if one rod fails to insert upon a reactor trip and remains stuck fully withdrawn. This condition requires an evaluation to determine that sufficient reactivity worth is held in the control rods to meet the SDM requirement, with the maximum worth rod stuck fully withdrawn.

Three types of analysis are performed in regard to static rod misalignment (Ref. 4). The first type of analysis considers the case where any one rod is completely inserted into the core with all other rods completely withdrawn. With control banks at their insertion limits, the second type of analysis considers the case when any one rod is completely inserted into the core. The third type of analysis considers the case of a completely withdrawn single rod from a bank inserted to its insertion limit. Satisfying limits on departure from nucleate boiling ratio in both of these cases bounds the situation when a rod is misaligned from its group by 12 steps.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-26 Revision XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES APPLICABLE Another type of misalignment occurs if one RCCA fails to insert upon a SAFETY ANALYSES reactor trip in response to a main steam pipe rupture and remains stuck (continued) fully withdrawn. This condition is assumed in the evaluation to determine that the required SDM is met with the maximum worth RCCA also fully withdrawn (Ref. 5). The reactor is shutdown by the boric acid injection delivered by the ECCS.

The Required Actions in this LCO ensure that either deviations from the alignment limits will be corrected or that THERMAL POWER will be adjusted so that excessive local linear heat rates (LHRs) will not occur, and that the requirements on SDM and ejected rod worth are preserved.

Continued operation of the reactor with a misaligned control rod is allowed if the heat flux hot channel factor (FQ(Z)) and the nuclear enthalpy hot channel N

factor(F H) are verified to be within their limits in the COLR and the safety analysis is verified to remain valid. When a control rod is misaligned, the assumptions that are used to determine the rod insertion limits, AFD limits, and quadrant power tilt limits are not preserved. Therefore, the limits may not N

preserve the design peaking factors, and FQ(Z) and F H must be verified directly using incore power distribution measurements. Bases Section 3.2 (Power Distribution Limits) contains more complete discussions of the relation of FQ(Z)

N and F H to the operating limits.

Shutdown and control rod OPERABILITY and alignment are directly related to power distributions and SDM, which are initial conditions assumed in safety analyses. Therefore they satisfy Criterion 2 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).

LCO The limits on shutdown or control rod alignments ensure that the assumptions in the safety analysis will remain valid. The requirements on OPERABILITY ensure that upon reactor trip, the assumed reactivity will be available and will be inserted.

The control rod OPERABILITY requirements (i.e., trippability) are acceptable from the alignment requirements, which ensure that the RCCAs and banks maintain the correct power distribution and rod alignment. The rod OPERABILITY requirement is satisfied provided the rod will fully insert in the required rod drop time assumed in the safety analysis. Rod control malfunctions that do not result in the inability to move a rod (e.g., rod lift coil failures), but that do not impact trippability, do not result in rod inoperability.

The requirement to maintain the rod alignment to within plus or minus 12 steps is conservative. The minimum misalignment assumed in safety analysis is 24 steps (15 inches), and in some cases a total misalignment from fully withdrawn to fully inserted is assumed.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-27 Revision 104, XX Amendment 82, XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES LCO Failure to meet the requirements of this LCO may produce unacceptable power (continued) peaking factors and LHRs, or unacceptable SDMs, all of which may constitute initial conditions inconsistent with the safety analysis.

APPLICABILITY The requirements on RCCA OPERABILITY and alignment are applicable in MODES 1 and 2 because these are the only MODES in which neutron (or fission) power is generated, and the OPERABILITY (i.e., trippability) and alignment of rods have the potential to affect the safety of the plant. In MODES 3, 4, 5, and 6, the alignment limits do not apply because the control rods are bottomed and the reactor is shut down and not producing fission power. In the shutdown MODES, the OPERABILITY of the shutdown and control rods has the potential to affect the required SDM, but this effect can be compensated for by an increase in the boron concentration of the RCS. See LCO 3.1.1, "SHUTDOWN MARGIN (SDM) - Tavg

> 200°F," for SDM in MODES 3 and 4, LCO 3.1.2, "Shutdown Margin (SDM)-Tavg 200°F" for SDM in MODE 5, and LCO 3.9.1, "Boron Concentration," for boron concentration requirements during refueling.

ACTIONS A.1.1 and A.1.2 When one or more rods are inoperable (i.e., untrippable), there is a possibility that the required SDM may be adversely affected. Under these conditions, it is important to determine the SDM, and if it is less than the required value, initiate boration until the required SDM is recovered. The Completion Time of 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> is adequate for determining SDM and, if necessary, for initiating boration to restore SDM.

In this situation, SDM verification must include the worth of the untrippable rod, as well as a rod of maximum worth.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-28 Revision XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES ACTIONS A.2 (continued)

If the inoperable rod(s) cannot be restored to OPERABLE status, the plant must be brought to a MODE or condition in which the LCO requirements are not applicable. To achieve this status, the unit must be brought to at least MODE 3 within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />.

The allowed Completion Time is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching MODE 3 from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.

B.1.1 and B.1.2 When a rod becomes misaligned, it can usually be moved and is still trippable.

An alternative to realigning a single misaligned RCCA to the group average position is to align the remainder of the group to the position of the misaligned RCCA. However, this must be done without violating the bank sequence, overlap, and insertion limits specified in LCO 3.1.6, "Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits," and LCO 3.1.7, "Control Bank Insertion Limits."

In many cases, realigning the remainder of the group to the misaligned rod may not be desirable. For example, realigning control bank B to a rod that is misaligned 15 steps from the top of the core would require a significant power reduction, since control bank D must be moved fully in and control bank C must be moved in to approximately 100 to 115 steps.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-29 Revision XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES ACTIONS B1.1 and B.1.2 (continued)

Power operation may continue with one RCCA trippable but misaligned, provided that SDM is verified within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />. The Completion Time of 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> represents the time necessary for determining the actual unit SDM and, if necessary, aligning and starting the necessary systems and components to initiate boration.

B.2, B.3, B.4, and B.5 For continued operation with a misaligned rod, RTP must be reduced, SDM must N

periodically be verified within limits, hot channel factors (FQ(Z) and F H) must be verified within limits, and the safety analyses must be re-evaluated to confirm continued operation is permissible.

Reduction of power to 75% RTP ensures that local LHR increases due to a misaligned RCCA will not cause the core design criteria to be exceeded (Ref. 6).

The Completion Time of 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> gives the operator sufficient time to accomplish an orderly power reduction without challenging the Reactor Protection System.

When a rod is known to be misaligned, there is a potential to impact the SDM.

Since the core conditions can change with time, periodic verification of SDM is required. A Frequency of 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> is sufficient to ensure this requirement continues to be met.

C W N Verifying that FQ(Z), as approximated by F Q(Z) and F Q(Z), and F H are within the required limits ensures that current operation at 75% RTP with a rod misaligned is not resulting in power distributions that may invalidate safety analysis assumptions at full power. The Completion Time of 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> allows sufficient time to obtain an incore power distribution measurement and to N

calculate FQ(Z) and F H.

Once current conditions have been verified acceptable, time is available to perform evaluations of accident analysis to determine that core limits will not be exceeded during a Design Basis Event for the duration of operation under these conditions. The accident analyses presented in UFSAR Chapter 15 (Ref. 3) that may be evaluated to ensure that the analyses remain valid for the duration of continued operation under these conditions. A Completion Time of 5 days is sufficient time to obtain the required input data and to perform the analysis.

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-30 Revision XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES ACTIONS C.1 (continued)

When Required Actions cannot be completed within their Completion Time, the unit must be brought to a MODE or Condition in which the LCO requirements are not applicable. To achieve this status, the unit must be brought to at least MODE 3 within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />, which obviates concerns about the development of undesirable xenon or power distributions. The allowed Completion Time of 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching MODE 3 from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging the plant systems.

D.1.1 and D.1.2 More than one control rod becoming misaligned from its group average position is not expected, and has the potential to reduce SDM. Therefore, SDM must be evaluated. One hour allows the operator adequate time to determine SDM.

Restoration of the required SDM, if necessary, requires increasing the RCS boron concentration to provide negative reactivity, as described in the Bases of LCO 3.1.1. The required Completion Time of 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> for initiating boration is reasonable, based on the time required for potential xenon redistribution, the low probability of an accident occurring, and the steps required to complete the action. This allows the operator sufficient time to align the required valves and start the boric acid pumps. Boration will continue until the required SDM is restored.

D.2 If more than one rod is found to be misaligned or becomes misaligned because of bank movement, the unit conditions fall outside of the accident analysis assumptions. Since automatic bank sequencing would continue to cause misalignment, the unit must be brought to a MODE or Condition in which the LCO requirements are not applicable. To achieve this status, the unit must be brought to at least MODE 3 within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />. The allowed Completion Time is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching MODE 3 from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-31 Revision XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES SURVEILLANCE SR 3.1.5.1 REQUIREMENTS Verification that the position of individual rod positions is within alignment limits at a Frequency of 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> provides a history that allows the operator to detect a rod that is beginning to deviate from its expected position. If the rod position deviation monitor is inoperable, a Frequency of 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> accomplishes the same goal. The specified Frequency takes into account other rod position information that is continuously available to the operator in the control room, so that during actual rod motion, deviations can immediately be detected.

The SR is modified by a NOTE that permits it to not be performed for rods associated with an inoperable demand position indicator or an inoperable rod position indicator. The alignment limit is based on the demand position indicator which is not available if the indicator is inoperable. LCO 3.1.8, Rod Position Indication, provides Actions to verify the rods are in alignment when one or more rod positon indicators are inoperable.

The Surveillance is modified by a Note which states that the SR is not required to be performed until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after associated rod motion. Control rod temperature affects the accuracy of the rod position indication system. Due to changes in the magnetic permeability of the drive shaft as a function of temperature, the indicated positon is expected to change with time as the drive shaft temperature changes. The one hour period allows control rod temperature to stabilize following rod movement in order to ensure the indicated rod positon is accurate.

SR 3.1.5.2 Verifying each control rod is OPERABLE would require that each rod be tripped.

However, in MODES 1 and 2, tripping each control rod would result in radial or axial power tilts, or oscillations. Exercising each individual control rod every 92 days provides increased confidence that all rods continue to be OPERABLE without exceeding the alignment limit, even if they are not regularly tripped.

Moving each control rod by 10 steps will not cause radial or axial power tilts, or oscillations, to occur. The 92 day Frequency takes into consideration other information available to the operator in the control room and SR 3.1.5.1, which is performed more frequently and adds to the determination of OPERABILITY of the rods. Between required performances of SR 3.1.5.2 (determination of control rod OPERABILITY by movement), if a control rod(s) is discovered to be immovable, but remains trippable and aligned, the control rod(s) is considered to be OPERABLE. At any time, if a control rod(s) is immovable, a determination of the trippability (OPERABILITY) of the control rod(s) must be made, and appropriate action taken.

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-32 Revision XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES SURVEILLANCE SR 3.1.5.3 REQUIREMENTS (continued) Verification of rod drop times allows the operator to determine that the maximum rod drop time permitted is consistent with the assumed rod drop time used in the safety analysis. Measuring rod drop times prior to reactor criticality, after each reactor vessel head removal, ensures that the reactor internals and rod drive mechanism will not interfere with rod motion or rod drop time, and that no degradation in these systems has occurred that would adversely affect control rod motion or drop time. This testing is performed with all RCPs operating and the average moderator temperature 551°F to simulate a reactor trip under actual conditions.

This Surveillance is performed during a plant outage, due to the plant conditions needed to perform the SR and the potential for an unplanned plant transient if the Surveillance were performed with the reactor at power.

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-33 Revision XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES REFERENCES 1. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50, Appendix A, General Design Criterion 10, "Reactor Design," and General Design Criterion 26, "Reactivity Control System Redundancy and Capability."

2. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50.46, "Acceptance Criteria for Emergency Core Cooling Systems for Light Water Nuclear Power Reactors."
3. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.0, "Accident Analyses."
4. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.3, "Rod Cluster Control Assembly Misalignment."
5. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.2, "Major Secondary System Pipe Rupture."
6. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.3.6, "Single Rod Cluster Control Assembly Withdrawal at Full Power."

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-34 Revision XX

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.6 B 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS B 3.1.6 Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits BASES BACKGROUND The insertion limits of the shutdown and control rods are initial assumptions in all safety analyses that assume rod insertion upon reactor trip. The insertion limits directly affect core power and fuel burnup distributions and assumptions of available ejected rod worth, SDM and initial reactivity insertion rate.

The applicable criteria for these reactivity and power distribution design requirements are 10 CFR 50, Appendix A, GDC 10, "Reactor Design," GDC 26, "Reactivity Control System Redundancy and Capability," and GDC 28, "Reactivity Limits" (Ref. 1), and 10 CFR 50.46, "Acceptance Criteria for Emergency Core Cooling Systems for Light Water Nuclear Power Reactors" (Ref. 2). Limits on control rod insertion have been established, and all rod positions are monitored and controlled during power operation to ensure that the power distribution and reactivity limits defined by the design power peaking and SDM limits are preserved.

The rod cluster control assemblies (RCCAs) are divided among control banks and shutdown banks. Each bank may be further subdivided into two groups to provide for precise reactivity control (Shutdown Banks C and D have only one group each). A group consists of two or more RCCAs that are electrically paralleled to step simultaneously. Except for Shutdown Banks C and D, a bank of RCCAs consists of two groups that are moved in a staggered fashion, but always within one step of each other. There are four control banks and four shutdown banks. See LCO 3.1.5, "Rod Group Alignment Limits," for control and shutdown rod OPERABILITY and alignment requirements, and LCO 3.1.8, "Rod Position Indication," for position indication requirements.

The control banks are used for precise reactivity control of the reactor. The positions of the control banks are normally automatically controlled by the Rod Control System, but they can also be manually controlled. They are capable of adding negative reactivity very quickly (compared to borating). The control banks must be maintained above designed insertion limits and are typically near the fully withdrawn position during normal full power operations.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-35 Revision 51, Revision XX

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.6 BASES BACKGROUND Hence, they are not capable of adding a large amount of positive reactivity.

(continued) Boration or dilution of the Reactor Coolant System (RCS) compensates for the reactivity changes associated with large changes in RCS temperature. The design calculations are performed with the assumption that the shutdown banks are withdrawn first. The shutdown banks are controlled manually by the control room operator. During normal unit operation, the shutdown banks are either fully withdrawn or fully inserted. The shutdown banks must be completely withdrawn from the core, prior to withdrawing any control banks during an approach to criticality. The shutdown banks can be fully withdrawn without the core going critical. This provides available negative reactivity in the event of boration errors.

The shutdown banks are then left in this position until the reactor is shut down.

They add negative reactivity to shut down the reactor upon receipt of a reactor trip signal.

APPLICABLE On a reactor trip, all RCCAs (shutdown banks and control banks), except SAFETY ANALYSES the most reactive RCCA, are assumed to insert into the core. The shutdown banks shall be at or above their insertion limits and available to insert the maximum amount of negative reactivity on a reactor trip signal. The control banks may be partially inserted in the core, as allowed by LCO 3.1.7, "Control Bank Insertion Limits." The shutdown bank and control bank insertion limits are established to ensure that a sufficient amount of negative reactivity is available to shut down the reactor and maintain the required SDM (see LCO 3.1.1, "SHUTDOWN MARGIN (SDM) - Tavg > 200°F," and LCO 3.1.2, "SHUTDOWN MARGIN (SDM) - Tavg 200°F") following a reactor trip from full power. The combination of control banks and shutdown banks (less the most reactive RCCA, which is assumed to be fully withdrawn) is sufficient to take the reactor from full power conditions at rated temperature to zero power, and to maintain the required SDM at rated no load temperature (Ref. 3). The shutdown bank insertion limit also limits the reactivity worth of an ejected shutdown rod.

The acceptance criteria for addressing shutdown and control rod bank insertion limits and inoperability or misalignment is that:

a. There be no violations of:
1. Specified acceptable fuel design limits, or
2. RCS pressure boundary integrity; and (continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-36 Revision XX

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.6 BASES APPLICABLE b. The core remains subcritical after accident transients other than a main SAFETY ANALYSES steam line break (MSLB).

(continued)

As such, the shutdown bank insertion limits affect safety analysis involving core reactivity and SDM (Ref. 3).

The shutdown bank insertion limits preserve an initial condition assumed in the safety analyses and, as such, satisfy Criterion 2 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).

LCO The shutdown banks must be within their insertion limits any time the reactor is critical or approaching criticality. This ensures that a sufficient amount of negative reactivity is available to shut down the reactor and maintain the required SDM following a reactor trip.

The shutdown bank insertion limits are defined in the COLR.

The LCO is modified by a Note indicating the LCO requirement is not applicable to shutdown banks being inserted while performing SR 3.1.3.2. This SR verifies the freedom of the rods to move, and may require the shutdown bank to move below the LCO limits, which would normally violate the LCO. This Note applies to each shutdown bank as it is moved below the insertion limit to perform the SR.

This Note is not applicable should a malfunction stop performance of the SR.

APPLICABILITY The shutdown banks must be within their insertion limits, with the reactor in MODES 1 and 2. This ensures that a sufficient amount of negative reactivity is available to shut down the reactor and maintain the required SDM following a reactor trip. The shutdown banks do not have to be within their insertion limits in MODE 3, unless an approach to criticality is being made. Refer to LCO 3.1.1 and LCO 3.1.2 for SDM requirements in MODES 3, 4, and 5. LCO 3.9.1, "Boron Concentration," ensures adequate SDM in MODE 6.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-37 Revision XX

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.6 BASES ACTIONS A.1, A.2.1, A.2.2, and A.3 If one shutdown bank is inserted less than or equal to 10 steps below the insertion limit, 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> is allowed to restore the shutdown bank to within the limit.

This is necessary because the available SDM may be reduced with a shutdown bank within its insertion limit. Also, verification of SDM or initiation of boration within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> is required, since the SDM in MODES 1 and 2 is ensured by adhering to the control and shutdown bank insertion limits (see LCO 3.1.1). If a shutdown bank is not within its insertion limit, SDM will be verified by performing a reactivity balance calculation, considering the effects listed in the BASES for SR 3.1.1.1.

While the shutdown bank is outside the insertion limit, all control banks must be within their insertion limits to ensure sufficient shutdown margin is available. The 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> Completion Time is sufficient to repair most rod control failures that would prevent movement of a shutdown bank.

B.1.1, B.1.2 and B.2 When one or more shutdown banks is not within insertion limits for reasons other than Condition A, 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> is allowed to restore the shutdown banks to within the insertion limits. This is necessary because the available SDM may be significantly reduced, with one or more of the shutdown banks not within their insertion limits. Also, verification of SDM or initiation of boration within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> is required, since the SDM in MODES 1 and 2 is ensured by adhering to the control and shutdown bank insertion limits (see LCO 3.1.1). If shutdown banks are not within their insertion limits, then SDM will be verified by performing a reactivity balance calculation, considering the effects listed in the Bases for SR 3.1.1.1.

The allowed Completion Time of 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> provides an acceptable time for evaluating and repairing minor problems without allowing the plant to remain in an unacceptable condition for an extended period of time.

C.1 If the Required Actions and associated Completion Times are not met, the unit must be brought to a MODE where the LCO is not applicable. The allowed Completion Time of 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching the required MODE from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-38 Revision XX

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.6 BASES SURVEILLANCE SR 3.1.6.1 REQUIREMENTS Verification that the shutdown banks are within their insertion limits prior to an approach to criticality ensures that when the reactor is critical, or being taken critical, the shutdown banks will be available to shut down the reactor, and the required SDM will be maintained following a reactor trip. This SR and Frequency ensure that the shutdown banks are withdrawn before the control banks are withdrawn during a unit startup.

The Surveillance is modified by a Note which states that the SR is not required to be performed for shutdown banks until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after motion of rods in those banks.

Rod temperature affects the accuracy of the rod position indication system. Due to changes in the magnetic permeability of the drive shaft as a function of temperature, the indicated position is expected to change with time as the drive shaft temperature changes. The one hour period allows rod temperature to stabilize following rod movement in order to ensure the indicated position is accurate.

Since the shutdown banks are positioned manually by the control room operator, a verification of shutdown bank position at a Frequency of 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />, after the reactor is taken critical, is adequate to ensure that they are within their insertion limits. Also, the 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> Frequency takes into account other information available in the control room for the purpose of monitoring the status of shutdown rods.

REFERENCES 1. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50, Appendix A, General Design Criterion 10, "Reactor Design," General Design Criterion 26, "Reactivity Control System Redundancy and Capability," and General Design Criterion 28, "Reactivity Limits."

2. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50.46, "Acceptance Criteria for Emergency Core Cooling Systems for Light Water Nuclear Power Reactors."
3. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.0, "Accident Analyses."

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-39 Revision XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES B 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS B 3.1.7 Control Bank Insertion Limits BASES BACKGROUND The insertion limits of the shutdown and control rods are initial assumptions in all safety analyses that assume rod insertion upon reactor trip. The insertion limits directly affect core power and fuel burnup distributions and assumptions of available ejected rod worth, SDM, and initial reactivity insertion rate.

The applicable criteria for these reactivity and power distribution design requirements are 10 CFR 50, Appendix A, GDC 10, "Reactor Design," GDC 26, "Reactivity Control System Redundancy and Capability," and GDC 28, "Reactivity Limits" (Ref. 1), and 10 CFR 50.46, "Acceptance Criteria for Emergency Core Cooling Systems for Light Water Nuclear Power Reactors" (Ref. 2). Limits on control rod insertion have been established, and all rod positions are monitored and controlled during power operation to ensure that the power distribution and reactivity limits defined by the design power peaking and SDM limits are preserved.

The rod cluster control assemblies (RCCAs) are divided among control banks and shutdown banks. Each bank may be further subdivided into two groups to provide for precise reactivity control (Shutdown Banks C and D have only one group each). A group consists of two or more RCCAs that are electrically paralleled to step simultaneously. Except for Shutdown Banks C and D, a bank of RCCAs consists of two groups that are moved in a staggered fashion, but always within one step of each other. There are four control banks and four shutdown banks. See LCO 3.1.5, "Rod Group Alignment Limits," for control and shutdown rod OPERABILITY and alignment requirements, and LCO 3.1.8, "Rod Position Indication," for position indication requirements.

The control bank insertion limits are specified in the COLR. An example is provided for information only in Figure B 3.1.7-1. The control banks are required to be at or above the insertion limit lines.

Figure B 3.1.7-1 also indicates how the control banks are moved in an overlap pattern. Overlap is the distance traveled together by two control banks. The predetermined position of control bank C, at which control bank D will begin Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-40 Revision XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES BACKGROUND to move with bank C on a withdrawal, as an example may be at 128 steps (continued). Therefore, in this example, control bank C overlaps control bank D from 128 steps to the fully withdrawn position for control bank C. The fully withdrawn position and predetermined overlap positions are defined in the COLR.

The control banks are used for precise reactivity control of the reactor. The positions of the control banks are normally controlled automatically by the Rod Control System, but can also be manually controlled. They are capable of adding reactivity very quickly (compared to borating or diluting).

The power density at any point in the core must be limited, so that the fuel design criteria are maintained. Together, LCO 3.1.5, Rod Group Alignment Limits, LCO 3.1.6, "Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits," LCO 3.1.7, Control Bank Insertion Limits, LCO 3.2.3, "AXIAL FLUX DIFFERENCE (AFD)," and LCO 3.2.4, "QUADRANT POWER TILT RATIO (QPTR)," provide limits on control component operation and on monitored process variables, which ensure that the core operates within the fuel design criteria.

The shutdown and control bank insertion and alignment limits, AFD, and QPTR are process variables that together characterize and control the three dimensional power distribution of the reactor core. Additionally, the control bank insertion limits control the reactivity that could be added in the event of a rod ejection accident, and the shutdown and control bank insertion limits ensure the required SDM is maintained.

Operation within the subject LCO limits will prevent fuel cladding failures that would breach the primary fission product barrier and release fission products to the reactor coolant in the event of a loss of coolant accident (LOCA), loss of flow, ejected rod, or other accident requiring termination by a Reactor Trip System (RTS) trip function.

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-41 Revision XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES APPLICABLE The shutdown and control bank insertion limits, AFD, and QPTR LCOs are SAFETY ANALYSES required to prevent power distributions that could result in fuel cladding failures in the event of a LOCA, loss of flow, ejected rod, or other accident requiring termination by an RTS trip function.

The acceptance criteria for addressing shutdown and control bank insertion limits and inoperability or misalignment are that:

a. There be no violations of:
1. Specified acceptable fuel design limits, or
2. Reactor Coolant System pressure boundary integrity; and
b. The core remains subcritical after accident transients other than a main steam line break (MSLB).

As such, the shutdown and control bank insertion limits affect safety analysis involving core reactivity and power distributions (Ref. 3 through 13).

The SDM requirement is ensured by limiting the control and shutdown bank insertion limits so that allowable inserted worth of the RCCAs is such that sufficient reactivity is available in the rods to shut down the reactor to hot zero power with a reactivity margin that assumes the maximum worth RCCA remains fully withdrawn upon trip (Ref. 5, 6, 8 and 11).

Operation at the insertion limits or AFD limits may approach the maximum allowable linear heat generation rate or peaking factor with the allowed QPTR present. Operation at the insertion limit may also indicate the maximum ejected RCCA worth could be equal to the limiting value in fuel cycles that have sufficiently high ejected RCCA worths.

The control and shutdown bank insertion limits ensure that safety analyses assumptions for SDM, ejected rod worth, and power distribution peaking factors are preserved (Ref. 3 through 13).

The insertion limits satisfy Criterion 2 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), in that they are initial conditions assumed in the safety analysis.

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-42 Revision XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES LCO The limits on control banks sequence, overlap, and physical insertion, as defined in the COLR, must be maintained because they serve the function of preserving power distribution, ensuring that the SDM is maintained, ensuring that ejected rod worth is maintained, and ensuring adequate negative reactivity insertion is available on trip. The overlap between control banks provides more uniform rates of reactivity insertion and withdrawal and is imposed to maintain acceptable power peaking during control bank motion.

The LCO is modified by a Note indicating the LCO requirement is not applicable to control banks being inserted while performing SR 3.1.5.2. This SR verifies the freedom of the rods to move, and may require the control bank to move below the LCO limits, which would normally violate the LCO. This Note applies to each control bank as it is moved below the insertion limit to perform the SR. This Note is not applicable should a malfunction stop performance of the SR.

APPLICABILITY The control bank sequence, overlap, and physical insertion limits shall be maintained with the reactor in MODES 1 and 2 with keff 1.0. These limits must be maintained, since they preserve the assumed power distribution, ejected rod worth, SDM, and reactivity rate insertion assumptions. Applicability in MODES 3, 4, and 5 is not required, since neither the power distribution nor ejected rod worth assumptions would be exceeded in these MODES.

ACTIONS A.1, A.2.1, A.2.2, and A.3 If Control Bank A, B, or C is inserted less than or equal to 10 steps below the insertion, sequence, or overlap limits, 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> is allowed to restore the control bank to within the limits. Verification of SDM or initiation of boration within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> is required, since the SDM in MODES 1 and 2 is ensured by adhering to the control and shutdown bank insertion limits (see LCO 3.1.1). If a control bank is not within its insertion limit, SDM will be verified by performing a reactivity balance calculation, considering the effects listed in the BASES for SR 3.1.1.1.

While the control bank is outside the insertion, sequence, or overlap limits, all shutdown banks must be within their insertion limits to ensure sufficient shutdown margin is available and that power distribution is controlled. The 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> Completion Time is sufficient to repair most rod control failures that would prevent movement of a shutdown bank.

Condition A is limited to Control Banks A, B, or C. The allowance is not required for Control Bank D because the full power bank insertion limit can be met during performance of the SR 3.1.5.2 control rod freedom of movement (trippability) testing.

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-43 Revision XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES ACTIONS B.1.1, B.1.2, B.2, C.1.1, C.1.2, and C.2 When the control banks are outside the acceptable insertion limits for reasons other than Condition A, they must be restored to within those limits. This restoration can occur in two ways:

a. Reducing power to be consistent with rod position; or
b. Moving rods to be consistent with power.

Also, verification of SDM or initiation of boration to regain SDM is required within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />, since the SDM in MODES 1 and 2 normally ensured by adhering to the control and shutdown bank insertion limits (see LCO 3.1.1, "SHUTDOWN MARGIN (SDM) - Tavg > 200°F") has been upset. If control banks are not within their insertion limits, then SDM will be verified by performing a reactivity balance calculation, considering the effects listed in the Bases for SR 3.1.1.1.

Similarly, if the control banks are found to be out of sequence or in the wrong overlap configuration for reasons other than Condition A, they must be restored to meet the limits.

Operation beyond the LCO limits is allowed for a short time period in order to take conservative action because the simultaneous occurrence of either a LOCA, loss of flow accident, ejected rod accident, or other accident during this short time period, together with an inadequate power distribution or reactivity capability, has an acceptably low probability.

The allowed Completion Time of 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> for restoring the banks to within the insertion, sequence, and overlap limits provides an acceptable time for evaluating and repairing minor problems without allowing the plant to remain in an unacceptable condition for an extended period of time.

D.1 If the Required Actions cannot be completed within the associated Completion Times, the plant must be brought to MODE 2 with keff < 1.0, where the LCO is not applicable. The allowed Completion Time of 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching the required MODE from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-44 Revision XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES SURVEILLANCE SR 3.1.7.1 REQUIREMENTS This Surveillance is required to ensure that the reactor does not achieve criticality with the control banks below their insertion limits.

The estimated critical position (ECP) depends upon a number of factors, one of which is xenon concentration. If the ECP was calculated long before criticality, xenon concentration could change to make the ECP substantially in error.

Conversely, determining the ECP immediately before criticality could be an unnecessary burden. There are a number of unit parameters requiring operator attention at that point. Performing the ECP calculation within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> prior to criticality avoids a large error from changes in xenon concentration, but allows the operator some flexibility to schedule the ECP calculation with other startup activities.

SR 3.1.7.2 With an OPERABLE bank insertion limit monitor, verification of the control bank insertion limits at a Frequency of 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> is sufficient to ensure OPERABILITY of the bank insertion limit monitor and to detect control banks that may be approaching the insertion limits since, normally, very little rod motion occurs in 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />. If the insertion limit monitor becomes inoperable, verification of the control bank position at a Frequency of 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> is sufficient to detect control banks that may be approaching the insertion limits.

The Surveillance is modified by a Note stating that the SR is not required to be performed for control banks until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after motion of rods in those banks.

Control rod temperature affects the accuracy of the rod position indication system. Due to changes in the magnetic permeability of the drive shaft as a function of temperature, the indicated position is expected to change with time as the drive shaft temperature changes. The one hour period allows control rod temperature to stabilize following rod movement in order to ensure the indicated rod position is accurate.

SR 3.1.7.3 When control banks are maintained within their insertion limits as checked by SR 3.1.7.2 above, it is unlikely that their sequence and overlap will not be in accordance with requirements provided in the COLR.

The Surveillance is modified by a Note stating that the SR is not required to be performed for control banks until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after motion of rods in those banks.

Control rod temperature affects the accuracy of the rod position indication system. Due to changes in the magnetic permeability of the drive shaft as a function of temperature, the indicated position is expected to change with time as the drive shaft temperature changes. The one hour period allows control rod temperature to stabilize following rod movement in order to ensure the indicated rod position is accurate.

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-45 Revision XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES SURVEILLANCE SR 3.1.7.3 (continued)

REQUIREMENTS A Frequency of 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> is consistent with the insertion limit check above in SR 3.1.7.2.

REFERENCES 1. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50, Appendix A, General Design Criterion 10, "Reactor Design," General Design Criterion 26, "Reactivity Control System Redundancy and Capability," and General Design Criterion 28, "Reactivity Limits."

2. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50.46, "Acceptance Criteria for Emergency Core Cooling Systems for Light Water Nuclear Power Reactors."
3. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.1, "Uncontrolled Rod Cluster Control Assembly Bank Withdrawal From a Subcritical Condition."
4. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.2, "Uncontrolled Rod Cluster Control Assembly Bank Withdrawal At Power."
5. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.3, "Rod Cluster Control Assembly Misalignment."
6. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.4, "Uncontrolled Boron Dilution."
7. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.5, "Partial Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow."
8. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.13, "Accidental Depressurization of the Main Steam System."
9. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.3.4, "Complete Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow."
10. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.3.6, "Single Rod Cluster Control Assembly Withdrawal At Full Power."
11. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.2.1, "Major Rupture of Main Steam Line."
12. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.4, "Single Reactor Coolant Pump Locked Rotor."
13. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.6, "Rupture of a Control Rod Drive Mechanism Housing (Rod Cluster Control Assembly Ejection)."

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-46 Revision XX

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-47 Revision XX

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 B 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS B 3.1.8 Rod Position Indication BASES BACKGROUND According to GDC 13 (Ref. 1), instrumentation to monitor variables and systems over their operating ranges during normal operation, anticipated operational occurrences, and accident conditions must be OPERABLE.

LCO 3.1.8 is required to ensure OPERABILITY of the control rod position indicators to determine control rod positions and thereby ensure compliance with the control rod alignment and insertion limits.

The OPERABILITY, including position indication, of the shutdown and control rods is an initial assumption in all safety analyses that assume rod insertion upon reactor trip. Maximum rod misalignment is an initial assumption in the safety analysis that directly affects core power distributions and assumptions of available SDM. Rod position indication is required to assess OPERABILITY and misalignment.

Mechanical or electrical failures may cause a control rod to become inoperable or to become misaligned from its group. Control rod inoperability or misalignment may cause increased power peaking, due to the asymmetric reactivity distribution and a reduction in the total available rod worth for reactor shutdown. Therefore, control rod alignment and OPERABILITY are related to core operation in design power peaking limits and the core design requirement of a minimum SDM.

Limits on control rod alignment and OPERABILITY have been established, and all rod positions are monitored and controlled during power operation to ensure that the power distribution and reactivity limits defined by the design power peaking and SDM limits are preserved.

Rod cluster control assemblies (RCCAs), or rods, are moved out of the core (up or withdrawn) or into the core (down or inserted) by their control rod drive mechanisms. The RCCAs are divided among control banks and shutdown banks. Each bank may be further subdivided into two groups to provide for precise reactivity control (Shutdown Banks C and D have only one group each).

The axial position of shutdown rods and control rods are determined by two separate and independent systems: the Bank Demand Position Indication System (commonly called group step counters) and the analog Rod Position Indication (RPI) System.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-48 Revision 51, XX

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES BACKGROUND The Bank Demand Position Indication System counts the pulses from the Rod (continued) Control System that move the rods. There is one step counter for each group of rods. Individual rods in a group all receive the same signal to move and should, therefore, all be at the same position indicated by the group step counter for that group. The Bank Demand Position Indication System is considered highly precise

(+/- 1 step or +/- 5/8 inch). If a rod does not move one step for each demand pulse, the step counter will still count the pulse and incorrectly reflect the position of the rod.

The RPI System provides an accurate indication of actual control rod position, but at a lower precision than the step counters. This system is based on inductive analog signals from a series of coils spaced along a hollow tube with a center to center distance of 3.75 inches, which is 6 steps. The normal indication accuracy of the RPI System is +/- 6 steps (+/- 3.75 inches), and the maximum uncertainty is

+/- 12 steps (+/- 7.5 inches). With an indicated deviation of 12 steps between the group step counter and RPI, the maximum deviation between actual rod position and the demand position could be 24 steps, or 15 inches.

APPLICABLE Control and shutdown rod position accuracy is essential during power operation.

SAFETY ANALYSES Power peaking, ejected rod worth, or SDM limits may be violated in the event of a Design Basis Accident (Ref. 2 through 12), with control or shutdown rods operating outside their limits undetected. Therefore, the acceptance criteria for rod position indication is that rod positions must be known with sufficient accuracy in order to verify the core is operating within the group sequence, overlap, design peaking limits, ejected rod worth, and with minimum SDM (LCO 3.1.6, "Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits," and LCO 3.1.7, "Control Bank Insertion Limits"). The rod positions must also be known in order to verify the alignment limits are preserved (LCO 3.1.5, "Rod Group Alignment Limits"). Control rod positions are continuously monitored to provide operators with information that ensures the plant is operating within the bounds of the accident analysis assumptions.

The control rod position indicator channels satisfy Criterion 2 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii). The control rod position indicators monitor control rod position, which is an initial condition of the accident.

LCO LCO 3.1.8 specifies that the RPI System and the Bank Demand Position Indication System be OPERABLE for all control rods. For the control rod position indicators to be OPERABLE requires meeting the SR of the LCO (when required) and the following:

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-49 Revision XX

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES LCO a. The RPI System indicates within 12 steps of the group step counter (continued) demand position as required by LCO 3.1.5, "Rod Group Alignment Limits;"

b. For the RPI System there are no failed coils; and
c. The Bank Demand Indication System has been calibrated either in the fully inserted position or to the RPI System.

The SR of the LCO is modified by a Note which states it is not required to be met for RPIs associated with rods that do not meet LCO 3.1.5. If a rod is known to not be within 12 steps of the group demand position, the Actions of LCO 3.1.5 provide appropriate Actions. Otherwise, the 12 step agreement limit between the Bank Demand Position Indication System and the RPI System indicates that the Bank Demand Position Indication System is adequately calibrated, and can be used for indication of the measurement of control rod bank position.

A deviation of less than the allowable limit, given in LCO 3.1.5, in position indication for a single control rod, ensures high confidence that the position uncertainty of the corresponding control rod group is within the assumed values used in the analysis (that specified control rod group insertion limits).

These requirements ensure that control rod position indication during power operation and PHYSICS TESTS is accurate, and that design assumptions are not challenged. OPERABILITY of the position indicator channels ensures that inoperable, misaligned, or mispositioned control rods can be detected.

Therefore, power peaking, ejected rod worth, and SDM can be controlled within acceptable limits.

The LCO is modified by a Note stating that the RPI system is not required to be OPERABLE for 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> following movement of the associated rods. Control and shutdown rod temperature affects the accuracy of the RPI System. Due to changes in the magnetic permeability of the drive shaft as a function of temperature, the indicated position is expected to change with time as the drive shaft temperature changes. The one hour period allows temperature to stabilize following rod movement in order to ensure the indicated positon is accurate.

APPLICABILITY The requirements on the RPI and step counters are only applicable in MODES 1 and 2 (consistent with LCO 3.1.5, LCO 3.1.6, and LCO 3.1.7), because these are the only MODES in which power is generated, and the OPERABILITY and alignment of rods have the potential to affect the safety of the plant. In the shutdown MODES, the OPERABILITY of the shutdown and control banks has the potential to affect the required SDM, but this effect can be compensated for by an increase in the boron concentration of the Reactor Coolant System.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-50 Revision 70 Amendment 58

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES ACTIONS The ACTIONS table is modified by a Note indicating that a separate Condition entry is allowed for each inoperable rod position indicator and each demand position indicator. This is acceptable because the Required Actions for each Condition provide appropriate compensatory actions for each inoperable position indicator.

A.1, A.2.1, and A.2.2 When one RPI channel per group in one or more groups fails, the position of the rod can still be determined indirectly by use of incore power distribution measurement information. Incore power distribution measurement information can be obtained from flux traces using the Movable Incore Detector System or from an OPERABLE Power Distribution Monitoring System (PDMS) (ref. 15). The Required Action may also be satisfied by ensuring at least once per 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> that FQ N

satisfies LCO 3.2.1, F H satisfies LCO 3.2.2, and SHUTDOWN MARGIN is within the limits provided in the COLR, provided the non-indicating rods have not been moved. Based on experience, normal power operation does not require excessive movement of banks. If a bank has been significantly moved, the Required Action of C.1 or C.2 below is required.

Therefore, verification of RCCA position within the Completion Time of 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> is adequate for allowing continued full power operation, since the probability of simultaneously having a rod significantly out of position and an event sensitive to that rod position is small.

Required Action A.1 requires verification of the positon of a rod with an inoperable RPI once per 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> which may put excessive wear and tear on the moveable incore detector system. Required Action A.2.1 provides an alternative. Required Action A.2.1 requires verification of rod position using the incore power distribution measurement information every 31 EFPD, which coincides with the normal measurements to verify core power distribution.

Required Action A.2.1 includes six distinct requirements for verification of the position of rods associated with an inoperable RPI using incore power distribution measurements information:

a. Initial verification within 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> of the inoperability of the RPI;
b. Re-verification once every 31 Effective Full Power Days (EFPD) thereafter;
c. Verification within 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> if rod control system parameters indicate unintended rod movement. An unintended rod movement is defined as the release of the rods stationary gripper when no action was demanded either manually or automatically from the rod control system, or a rod motion in a direction other than the direction demanded by the rod control system. Verifying that no unintended rod movement has occurred is performed by monitoring the rod control system stationary gripper coil current for indications of rod movement; (continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-51 Revision 70 Amendment 58

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES ACTIONS d. Verification within 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> if the rod with an inoperable RPI is (continued) intentionally moved greater than 12 steps;

e. Verification prior to exceeding 50% RTP if power is reduced below 50% RTP; and
f. Verification within 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> of reaching 100% RTP if power is reduced to less than 100% power RTP.

Should the rod with the inoperable RPI be moved more than 12 steps, or if reactor power is changed, the position of the rod with the inoperable RPI must be verified.

Required Action A.2.2 states that the inoperable RPI must be restored to OPERABLE status prior to entering MODE 2 from MODE 3. The repair of the inoperable RPI must be performed prior to returning to power operation following a shutdown.

A.3 Reduction of THERMAL POWER to 50% RTP puts core into a condition where rod position is not significantly affecting core peaking factors (Ref.

4). The allowed Completion Time of 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reducing power to 50% RTP from full power conditions without challenging plant systems and allowing for rod positon determination by Required Action A.1 above.

B.1 and B.2 When more than one RPI per group in one or more groups fail, additional actions are necessary. Placing the Rod Control System in manual assures unplanned rod motion will not occur. The immediate Completion Time for placing the Rod Control System in manual reflects the urgency with which unplanned rod motion must be prevented while in this Condition.

The inoperable RPIs must be restored, such that a maximum of one RPI per group is inoperable, within 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />. The 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> Completion Time provides sufficient time to troubleshoot and restore the RPI system to operation while avoiding the plant challenges associated with the shutdown without full rod position indication.

Based on operating experience, normal power operation does not require excessive rod movement. If one or more rods has been significantly moved, the Required Action of C.1 or C.2 below is required.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-52 Revision 70 Amendment 58

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES ACTIONS C.1 and C.2 (continued)

With one or more RPI inoperable in one or more groups and the affected groups have moved greater than 24 steps in one direction since the last determination of rod position, additional actions are needed to verify the position of rods with inoperable RPI. Within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />, the position of the rods with inoperable position indication must be determined using either the moveable incore detectors or PDMS to verify these rods are still properly positioned, relative to their group positions.

If, within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />, the rod positions have not been determined, THERMAL POWER must be reduced to 50% RTP within 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> to avoid undesirable power distributions that could result from continued operation at 50% RTP, if one or more rods are misaligned by more than 24 steps.

The allowed Completion Time of 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> provides an acceptable period of time to verify the rod positions.

D.1.1 and D.1.2 With one or more demand position indicators per bank inoperable in one or more banks, the rod positions can be determined by the RPI System.

Since normal power operation does not require excessive movement of rods, verification by administrative means that the rod position indicators are OPERABLE and the most withdrawn rod and the least withdrawn rod are 12 steps apart within the allowed Completion Time of once every 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> is adequate.

D.2 Reduction of THERMAL POWER to 50% RTP puts the core into a condition where rod position is not significantly affecting core peaking factor limits (Ref. 13). The allowed Completion Time of 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> provides an acceptable period of time to verify the rod positions per Required Actions D.1.1 and D.1.2 or reduce power to 50% RTP.

E.1 If the Required Actions cannot be completed within the associated Completion Time, the plant must be brought to a MODE in which the requirement does not apply. To achieve this status, the plant must be brought to at least MODE 3 within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />. The allowed Completion Time is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching the required MODE from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-53 Revision 70 Amendment 58

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES SURVEILLANCE SR 3.1.8.1 REQUIREMENTS Verification that the RPI agrees with the demand position within 12 steps ensures that the RPI is operating correctly.

This Surveillance is performed prior to reactor criticality after each removal of the reactor head, as there is the potential for unnecessary plant transients if the SR were performed with the reactor at power.

The Surveillance is modified by a Note which states it is not required to be met for RPIs associated with rods that do not meet LCO 3.1.5. If a rod is known to not be within 12 steps of the group demand position, the ACTIONS of LCO 3.1.5 provide the appropriate Actions.

(continued)

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-54 Revision 70 Amendment 58

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES (continued)

REFERENCES 1. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50, Appendix A, General Design Criterion 13, "Instrumentation and Control."

2. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.1, Uncontrolled Rod Cluster Control Assembly Bank Withdrawal From a Subcritical Condition."
3. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.2, Uncontrolled Rod Cluster Control Assembly Bank Withdrawal At Power."
4. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.3, Rod Cluster Control Assembly Misalignment."
5. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.4, Uncontrolled Boron Dilution."
6. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.5, Partial Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow."
7. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.13, Accidental Depressurization of the Main Steam System."
8. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.3.4, Complete Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow."
9. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.3.6, Single Rod Cluster Control Assembly Withdrawal At Full Power."
10. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.2.1, Major Rupture of Main Steam Line."
11. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.4, Single Reactor Coolant Pump Locked Rotor."
12. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.6, Rupture of a Control Rod Drive Mechanism Housing (Rod Cluster Control Assembly Ejection)."
13. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 4.3, Nuclear Design."
14. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 7.7.1.3.2, Main Control Room Rod Position Indication.
15. WCAP-12472-P-A,BEACON Core Monitoring and Operations Support System, August 1994.

Watts Bar-Unit 1 B 3.1-54a Revision 70, 104 Amendment 58, 82

This Page Intentionally Left Blank.

Enclosure 8 Proposed Technical Specification Bases Changes (Final Typed) for WBN Unit 2 (For Information Only)

CNL-17-123

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 B 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS B 3.1.5 Rod Group Alignment Limits BASES BACKGROUND The OPERABILITY (e.g., trippability) of the shutdown and control rods is an initial assumption in all safety analyses that assume rod insertion upon reactor trip. Maximum rod misalignment is an initial assumption in the safety analysis that directly affects core power distributions and assumptions of available SDM.

The applicable criteria for these reactivity and power distribution design requirements are 10 CFR 50, Appendix A, GDC 10, "Reactor Design,"

and GDC 26, "Reactivity Control System Redundancy and Capability,"

(Ref. 1), and 10 CFR 50.46, "Acceptance Criteria for Emergency Core Cooling Systems for Light Water Nuclear Power Reactors" (Ref. 2).

Mechanical or electrical failures may cause a control or shutdown rod to become inoperable or to become misaligned from its group. Control rod inoperability or misalignment may cause increased power peaking, due to the asymmetric reactivity distribution and a reduction in the total available rod worth for reactor shutdown. Therefore, control rod alignment and OPERABILITY are related to core operation in design power peaking limits and the core design requirement of a minimum SDM.

Limits on control rod alignment have been established, and all rod positions are monitored and controlled during power operation to ensure that the power distribution and reactivity limits defined by the design power peaking and SDM limits are preserved.

Rod cluster control assemblies (RCCAs), or rods, are moved by their control rod drive mechanisms (CRDMs). Each CRDM moves its RCCA one step (approximately 5/8 inch) at a time, but at varying rates (steps per minute) depending on the signal output from the Rod Control System.

The RCCAs are divided among control banks and shutdown banks. Each bank may be further subdivided into two groups to provide for precise reactivity control (Shutdown Banks C and D have only one group each).

A group consists of two or more RCCAs that are electrically paralleled to step simultaneously. Except for Shutdown Banks C and D, (continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-25 Revision XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES BACKGROUND a bank of RCCAs consists of two groups that are moved in a staggered (continued) fashion, but always within one step of each other. There are four control banks and four shutdown banks.

The shutdown banks are maintained either in the fully inserted or fully withdrawn position. The control banks are moved in an overlap pattern, using the following withdrawal sequence: When control bank A reaches a predetermined height in the core, control bank B begins to move out with control bank A. Control bank A stops at the position of maximum withdrawal, and control bank B continues to move out. When control bank B reaches a predetermined height, control bank C begins to move out with control bank B. This sequence continues until control banks A, B, and C are at the fully withdrawn position, and control bank D is approximately halfway withdrawn. The insertion sequence is the opposite of the withdrawal sequence. The control rods are arranged in a radially symmetric pattern, so that control bank motion does not introduce radial asymmetries in the core power distributions.

The axial position of shutdown rods and control rods is indicated by two separate and independent systems, which are the Bank Demand Position Indication System (commonly called group step counters) and the Rod Position Indication (RPI) System.

The Bank Demand Position Indication System counts the pulses from the rod control system that moves the rods. There is one step counter for each group of rods. Individual rods in a group all receive the same signal to move and should, therefore, all be at the same position indicated by the group step counter for that group. The Bank Demand Position Indication System is considered highly precise (+/- 1 step or +/- 5/8 inch). If a rod does not move one step for each demand pulse, the step counter will still count the pulse and incorrectly reflect the position of the rod.

The RPI System provides an accurate indication of actual control rod position, but at a lower precision than the step counters. This system is based on inductive analog signals from a series of coils spaced along a hollow tube with a center to center distance of 3.75 inches, which is six steps. The normal indication accuracy of the RPI System is +/- 6 steps

(+/- 3.75 inches), and the maximum uncertainty is +/- 12 steps

(+/- 7.5 inches). With an indicated deviation of 12 steps between the group step counter and RPI, the maximum deviation between actual rod position and the demand position could be 24 steps, or 15 inches.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-26 (continued)

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES (continued)

APPLICABLE Control rod misalignment accidents are analyzed in the safety analysis SAFETY (Ref. 3). The acceptance criteria for addressing control rod inoperability ANALYSES or misalignment are that:

a. There be no violations of:
1. Specified acceptable fuel design limits, or
2. Reactor Coolant System (RCS) pressure boundary integrity; and
b. The core remains subcritical after accident transients other than a main steam line break (MSLB).

Two types of misalignment are distinguished. During movement of a control rod group, one rod may stop moving, while the other rods in the group continue. This condition may cause excessive power peaking.

The second type of misalignment occurs if one rod fails to insert upon a reactor trip and remains stuck fully withdrawn. This condition requires an evaluation to determine that sufficient reactivity worth is held in the control rods to meet the SDM requirement, with the maximum worth rod stuck fully withdrawn.

Three types of analysis are performed in regard to static rod misalignment (Ref. 4). The first type of analysis considers the case where any one rod is completely inserted into the core with all other rods completely withdrawn. With control banks at their insertion limits, the second type of analysis considers the case when any one rod is completely inserted into the core. The third type of analysis considers the case of a completely withdrawn single rod from a bank inserted to its insertion limit. Satisfying limits on departure from nucleate boiling ratio in both of these cases bounds the situation when a rod is misaligned from its group by 12 steps.

Another type of misalignment occurs if one RCCA fails to insert upon a reactor trip in response to a main steam pipe rupture and remains stuck fully withdrawn. This condition is assumed in the evaluation to determine that the required SDM is met with the maximum worth RCCA also fully withdrawn (Ref. 5). The reactor is shutdown by the boric acid injection delivered by the ECCS.

The Required Actions in this LCO ensure that either deviations from the alignment limits will be corrected or that THERMAL POWER will be adjusted so that excessive local linear heat rates (LHRs) will not occur, and that the requirements on SDM and ejected rod worth are preserved.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-27 Revision XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES APPLICABLE Continued operation of the reactor with a misaligned control rod is SAFETY allowed if the heat flux hot channel factor (FQ(Z)) and the nuclear enthalpy ANALYSES hot channel factor (FNH) are verified to be within their limits in the COLR (continued) and the safety analysis is verified to remain valid. When a control rod is misaligned, the assumptions that are used to determine the rod insertion limits, AFD limits, and quadrant power tilt limits are not preserved.

Therefore, the limits may not preserve the design peaking factors, and FQ(Z) and FNH must be verified directly using incore power distribution measurements. Bases Section 3.2 (Power Distribution Limits) contains more complete discussions of the relation of FQ(Z) and FNH to the operating limits.

Shutdown and control rod OPERABILITY and alignment are directly related to power distributions and SDM, which are initial conditions assumed in safety analyses. Therefore they satisfy Criterion 2 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).

LCO The limits on shutdown or control rod alignments ensure that the assumptions in the safety analysis will remain valid. The requirements on OPERABILITY ensure that upon reactor trip, the assumed reactivity will be available and will be inserted. The control rod OPERABILITY requirements (i.e., trippability) are separate from the alignment requirements, which ensure that the RCCAs and banks maintain the correct power distribution and rod alignment. The rod OPERABILITY requirement is satisfied provided the rod will fully insert in the required rod drop time assumed in the safety analysis. Rod control malfunctions that result in the inability to move a rod (e.g., rod lift coil failures), but that do not impact trippability, do not result in rod inoperability.

The requirement to maintain the rod alignment to within plus or minus 12 steps is conservative. The minimum misalignment assumed in safety analysis is 24 steps (15 inches), and in some cases a total misalignment from fully withdrawn to fully inserted is assumed.

Failure to meet the requirements of this LCO may produce unacceptable power peaking factors and LHRs, or unacceptable SDMs, all of which may constitute initial conditions inconsistent with the safety analysis.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-28 (continued)

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES (continued)

APPLICABILITY The requirements on RCCA OPERABILITY and alignment are applicable in MODES 1 and 2 because these are the only MODES in which neutron (or fission) power is generated, and the OPERABILITY (i.e., trippability) and alignment of rods have the potential to affect the safety of the plant.

In MODES 3, 4, 5, and 6, the alignment limits do not apply because the control rods are bottomed and the reactor is shut down and not producing fission power. In the shutdown MODES, the OPERABILITY of the shutdown and control rods has the potential to affect the required SDM, but this effect can be compensated for by an increase in the boron concentration of the RCS. See LCO 3.1.1, "SHUTDOWN MARGIN (SDM) - Tavg > 200°F," for SDM in MODES 3 and 4, LCO 3.1.2, "Shutdown Margin (SDM) - Tavg 200°F" for SDM in MODE 5, and LCO 3.9.1, "Boron Concentration," for boron concentration requirements during refueling.

ACTIONS A.1.1 and A.1.2 When one or more rods are inoperable (i.e., untrippable), there is a possibility that the required SDM may be adversely affected. Under these conditions, it is important to determine the SDM, and if it is less than the required value, initiate boration until the required SDM is recovered. The Completion Time of 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> is adequate for determining SDM and, if necessary, for initiating boration to restore SDM.

In this situation, SDM verification must include the worth of the untrippable rod, as well as a rod of maximum worth.

A.2 If the inoperable rod(s) cannot be restored to OPERABLE status, the plant must be brought to a MODE or condition in which the LCO requirements are not applicable. To achieve this status, the unit must be brought to at least MODE 3 within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />.

The allowed Completion Time is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching MODE 3 from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-29 Revision XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES ACTIONS B.1.1 and B.1.2 (continued)

When a rod becomes misaligned, it can usually be moved and is still trippable.

An alternative to realigning a single misaligned RCCA to the group average position is to align the remainder of the group to the position of the misaligned RCCA. However, this must be done without violating the bank sequence, overlap, and insertion limits specified in LCO 3.1.6, "Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits," and LCO 3.1.7, "Control Bank Insertion Limits."

In many cases, realigning the remainder of the group to the misaligned rod may not be desirable. For example, realigning control bank B to a rod that is misaligned 15 steps from the top of the core would require a significant power reduction, since control bank D must be moved fully in and control bank C must be moved in to approximately 100 to 115 steps.

Power operation may continue with one RCCA trippable but misaligned, provided that SDM is verified within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />. The Completion Time of 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> represents the time necessary for determining the actual unit SDM and, if necessary, aligning and starting the necessary systems and components to initiate boration.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-30 Revision XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES ACTIONS B.2, B.3, B.4, and B.5 (continued)

For continued operation with a misaligned rod, RTP must be reduced, SDM must periodically be verified within limits, hot channel factors (FQ(Z) and FNH) must be verified within limits, and the safety analyses must be re-evaluated to confirm continued operation is permissible.

Reduction of power to 75% RTP ensures that local LHR increases due to a misaligned RCCA will not cause the core design criteria to be exceeded (Ref. 6). The Completion Time of 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> gives the operator sufficient time to accomplish an orderly power reduction without challenging the Reactor Protection System.

When a rod is known to be misaligned, there is a potential to impact the SDM. Since the core conditions can change with time, periodic verification of SDM is required. A Frequency of 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> is sufficient to ensure this requirement continues to be met.

Verifying that FQ(Z), as approximated by FCQ(Z) and FW Q(Z), and FNH are within the required limits ensures that current operation at 75% RTP with a rod misaligned is not resulting in power distributions that may invalidate safety analysis assumptions at full power. The Completion Time of 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> allows sufficient time to obtain an incore power distribution measurement and to calculate FQ(Z) and FNH.

Once current conditions have been verified acceptable, time is available to perform evaluations of accident analysis to determine that core limits will not be exceeded during a Design Basis Event for the duration of operation under these conditions. The accident analyses presented in UFSAR Chapter 15 (Ref. 3) that may be adversely affected will be evaluated to ensure that the analyses remain valid for the duration of continued operation under these conditions. A Completion Time of 5 days is sufficient time to obtain the required input data and to perform the analysis.

C.1 When Required Actions cannot be completed within their Completion Time, the unit must be brought to a MODE or Condition in which the LCO requirements are not applicable. To achieve this status, the unit must be brought to at least MODE 3 within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />, which obviates concerns about the development of undesirable xenon or power distributions. The allowed Completion Time of 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching MODE 3 from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging the plant systems.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-31 Revision XX

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES ACTIONS D.1.1 and D.1.2 (continued)

More than one control rod becoming misaligned from its group average position is not expected, and has the potential to reduce SDM. Therefore, SDM must be evaluated. One hour allows the operator adequate time to determine SDM. Restoration of the required SDM, if necessary, requires increasing the RCS boron concentration to provide negative reactivity, as described in the Bases of LCO 3.1.1. The required Completion Time of 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> for initiating boration is reasonable, based on the time required for potential xenon redistribution, the low probability of an accident occurring, and the steps required to complete the action. This allows the operator sufficient time to align the required valves and start the boric acid pumps.

Boration will continue until the required SDM is restored.

D.2 If more than one rod is found to be misaligned or becomes misaligned because of bank movement, the unit conditions fall outside of the accident analysis assumptions. Since automatic bank sequencing would continue to cause misalignment, the unit must be brought to a MODE or Condition in which the LCO requirements are not applicable.

To achieve this status, the unit must be brought to at least MODE 3 within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />. The allowed Completion Time is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching MODE 3 from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.

SURVEILLANCE SR 3.1.5.1 REQUIREMENTS Verification that the position of individual rods is within alignment limits at a Frequency of 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> provides a history that allows the operator to detect a rod that is beginning to deviate from its expected position. If the rod position deviation monitor is inoperable, a Frequency of 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> accomplishes the same goal. The specified Frequency takes into account other rod position information that is continuously available to the operator in the control room, so that during actual rod motion, deviations can immediately be detected.

The SR is modified by a NOTE that permits it to not be performed for rods associated with an inoperable demand position indicator or an inoperable rod position indicator. The alignment limit is based on the demand position indicator which is not available if the indicator is inoperable. LCO 3.1.8, Rod Position Indication, provides Actions to verify the rods are in alignment when one or more rod positon indicators are inoperable.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-32 (continued)

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES SURVEILLANCE SR 3.1.5.1 (continued)

REQUIREMENTS (continued) The Surveillance is modified by a Note which states that the SR is not required to be performed until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after associated rod motion. Control rod temperature affects the accuracy of the rod position indication system. Due to changes in the magnetic permeability of the drive shaft as a function of temperature, the indicated position is expected to change with time as the drive shaft temperature changes. The one hour period allows control rod temperature to stabilize following rod movement in order to ensure the indicated rod positon is accurate.

SR 3.1.5.2 Verifying each control rod is OPERABLE would require that each rod be tripped. However, in MODES 1 and 2, tripping each control rod would result in radial or axial power tilts, or oscillations. Exercising each individual control rod every 92 days provides increased confidence that all rods continue to be OPERABLE without exceeding the alignment limit, even if they are not regularly tripped. Moving each control rod by 10 steps will not cause radial or axial power tilts, or oscillations, to occur.

The 92 day Frequency takes into consideration other information available to the operator in the control room and SR 3.1.5.1, which is performed more frequently and adds to the determination of OPERABILITY of the rods. Between required performances of SR 3.1.5.2 (determination of control rod OPERABILITY by movement), if a control rod(s) is discovered to be immovable, but remains trippable and aligned, the control rod(s) is considered to be OPERABLE. At any time, if a control rod(s) is immovable, a determination of the trippability (OPERABILITY) of the control rod(s) must be made, and appropriate action taken.

SR 3.1.5.3 Verification of rod drop times allows the operator to determine that the maximum rod drop time permitted is consistent with the assumed rod drop time used in the safety analysis. Measuring rod drop times prior to reactor criticality after each reactor vessel head removal ensures that the reactor internals and rod drive mechanism will not interfere with rod motion or rod drop time, and that no degradation in these systems has occurred that would adversely affect control rod motion or drop time. This testing is performed with all RCPs operating and the average moderator temperature 551°F to simulate a reactor trip under actual conditions.

This Surveillance is performed during a plant outage, due to the plant conditions needed to perform the SR and the potential for an unplanned plant transient if the Surveillance were performed with the reactor at power.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-33 (continued)

Rod Group Alignment Limits B 3.1.5 BASES (continued)

REFERENCES 1. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50, Appendix A, General Design Criterion 10, "Reactor Design," and General Design Criterion 26, "Reactivity Control System Redundancy and Capability."

2. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50.46, "Acceptance Criteria for Emergency Core Cooling Systems for Light Water Nuclear Power Reactors."
3. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.0, "Accident Analyses."
4. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.3, "Rod Cluster Control Assembly Misalignment."
5. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.2, "Major Secondary System Pipe Rupture."
6. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.3.6, "Single Rod Cluster Control Assembly Withdrawal at Full Power."

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-34

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.6 B 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS B 3.1.6 Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits BASES BACKGROUND The insertion limits of the shutdown and control rods are initial assumptions in all safety analyses that assume rod insertion upon reactor trip. The insertion limits directly affect core power and fuel burnup distributions and assumptions of available ejected rod worth, SDM and initial reactivity insertion rate.

The applicable criteria for these reactivity and power distribution design requirements are 10 CFR 50, Appendix A, GDC 10, "Reactor Design,"

GDC 26, "Reactivity Control System Redundancy and Capability," and GDC 28, "Reactivity Limits" (Ref. 1), and 10 CFR 50.46, "Acceptance Criteria for Emergency Core Cooling Systems for Light Water Nuclear Power Reactors" (Ref. 2). Limits on control rod insertion have been established, and all rod positions are monitored and controlled during power operation to ensure that the power distribution and reactivity limits defined by the design power peaking and SDM limits are preserved.

The rod cluster control assemblies (RCCAs) are divided among control banks and shutdown banks. Each bank may be further subdivided into two groups to provide for precise reactivity control (Shutdown Banks C and D have only one group each). A group consists of two or more RCCAs that are electrically paralleled to step simultaneously. Except for Shutdown Banks C and D, a bank of RCCAs consists of two groups that are moved in a staggered fashion, but always within one step of each other. There are four control banks and four shutdown banks. See LCO 3.1.5, "Rod Group Alignment Limits," for control and shutdown rod OPERABILITY and alignment requirements, and LCO 3.1.8, "Rod Position Indication," for position indication requirements.

The control banks are used for precise reactivity control of the reactor.

The positions of the control banks are normally automatically controlled by the Rod Control System, but they can also be manually controlled.

They are capable of adding negative reactivity very quickly (compared to borating). The control banks must be maintained above designed insertion limits and are typically near the fully withdrawn position during normal full power operations.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-35

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.6 BASES BACKGROUND Hence, they are not capable of adding a large amount of positive (continued) reactivity. Boration or dilution of the Reactor Coolant System (RCS) compensates for the reactivity changes associated with large changes in RCS temperature. The design calculations are performed with the assumption that the shutdown banks are withdrawn first. The shutdown banks are controlled manually by the control room operator. During normal unit operation, the shutdown banks are either fully withdrawn or fully inserted. The shutdown banks must be completely withdrawn from the core, prior to withdrawing any control banks during an approach to criticality. The shutdown banks can be fully withdrawn without the core going critical. This provides available negative reactivity in the event of boration errors. The shutdown banks are then left in this position until the reactor is shut down. They add negative reactivity to shut down the reactor upon receipt of a reactor trip signal.

APPLICABLE On a reactor trip, all RCCAs (shutdown banks and control banks), except SAFETY the most reactive RCCA, are assumed to insert into the core. The ANALYSES shutdown banks shall be at or above their insertion limits and available to insert the maximum amount of negative reactivity on a reactor trip signal.

The control banks may be partially inserted in the core, as allowed by LCO 3.1.7, "Control Bank Insertion Limits." The shutdown bank and control bank insertion limits are established to ensure that a sufficient amount of negative reactivity is available to shut down the reactor and maintain the required SDM (see LCO 3.1.1, "SHUTDOWN MARGIN (SDM) - Tavg > 200°F," and LCO 3.1.2, "SHUTDOWN MARGIN (SDM) -

Tavg 200°F") following a reactor trip from full power. The combination of control banks and shutdown banks (less the most reactive RCCA, which is assumed to be fully withdrawn) is sufficient to take the reactor from full power conditions at rated temperature to zero power, and to maintain the required SDM at rated no load temperature (Ref. 3). The shutdown bank insertion limit also limits the reactivity worth of an ejected shutdown rod.

The acceptance criteria for addressing shutdown and control rod bank insertion limits and inoperability or misalignment is that:

a. There be no violations of:
1. Specified acceptable fuel design limits, or
2. RCS pressure boundary integrity; and
b. The core remains subcritical after accident transients other than a main steam line break (MSLB).

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-36

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.6 BASES APPLICABLE As such, the shutdown bank insertion limits affect safety analysis SAFETY involving core reactivity and SDM (Ref. 3).

ANALYSES (continued) The shutdown bank insertion limits preserve an initial condition assumed in the safety analyses and, as such, satisfy Criterion 2 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).

LCO The shutdown banks must be within their insertion limits any time the reactor is critical or approaching criticality. This ensures that a sufficient amount of negative reactivity is available to shut down the reactor and maintain the required SDM following a reactor trip.

The shutdown bank insertion limits are defined in the COLR.

The LCO is modified by a Note indicating the LCO requirement is not applicable to shutdown banks being inserted while performing SR 3.1.5.2.

This SR verifies the freedom of the rods to move, and may require the shutdown bank to move below the LCO limits, which would normally violate the LCO. This Note applies to each shutdown bank as it is moved below the insertion limit to perform the SR. This Note is not applicable should a malfunction stop performance of the SR.

APPLICABILITY The shutdown banks must be within their insertion limits, with the reactor in MODES 1 and 2. This ensures that a sufficient amount of negative reactivity is available to shut down the reactor and maintain the required SDM following a reactor trip. The shutdown banks do not have to be within their insertion limits in MODE 3, unless an approach to criticality is being made. Refer to LCO 3.1.1 and LCO 3.1.2 for SDM requirements in MODES 3, 4, and 5. LCO 3.9.1, "Boron Concentration," ensures adequate SDM in MODE 6.

ACTIONS A.1, A.2.1, A.2.2, and A.3 If one shutdown bank is inserted less than or equal to 10 steps below the insertion limit, 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> is allowed to restore the shutdown bank to within the limit. This is necessary because the available SDM may be reduced with a shutdown bank not within its insertion limit. Also, verification of SDM or initiation of boration within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> is required, since the SDM in MODES 1 and 2 is ensured by adhering to the control and shutdown bank insertion limits (see LCO 3.1.1). If a shutdown bank is not within its insertion limit, SDM will be verified by performing a reactivity balance calculation, considering the effects listed in the BASES for SR 3.1.1.1.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-37

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.6 BASES While the shutdown bank is outside the insertion limit, all control banks must be within their insertion limits to ensure sufficient shutdown margin is available. The 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> Completion Time is sufficient to repair most rod control failures that would prevent movement of a shutdown bank.

B.1.1, B.1.2 and B.2 When one or more shutdown bank is not within insertion limits for reasons other than Condition A, 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> is allowed to restore the shutdown banks to within the insertion limits. This is necessary because the available SDM may be significantly reduced, with one or more of the shutdown banks not within their insertion limits. Also, verification of SDM or initiation of boration within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> is required, since the SDM in MODES 1 and 2 is ensured by adhering to the control and shutdown bank insertion limits (See LCO 3.1.1.). If shutdown banks are not within their insertion limits, then SDM will be verified by performing a reactivity balance calculation, considering the effects listed in the Bases for SR 3.1.1.1.

The allowed Completion Time of 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> provides an acceptable time for evaluating and repairing minor problems without allowing the plant to remain in an unacceptable condition for an extended period of time.

C.1 If the Required Actions and associated Completion Times are not met, the unit must be brought to a MODE where the LCO is not applicable.

The allowed Completion Time of 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching the required MODE from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-38

Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.6 BASES SURVEILLANCE SR 3.1.6.1 REQUIREMENTS Verification that the shutdown banks are within their insertion limits prior to an approach to criticality ensures that when the reactor is critical, or being taken critical, the shutdown banks will be available to shut down the reactor, and the required SDM will be maintained following a reactor trip.

This SR and Frequency ensure that the shutdown banks are withdrawn before the control banks are withdrawn during a unit startup.

The Surveillance is modified by a Note which states that the SR is not required to be performed for shutdown banks until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after motion of rods in those banks. Rod temperature affects the accuracy of the rod position indication system. Due to changes in the magnetic permeability of the drive shaft as a function of temperature, the indicated position is expected to change with time as the drive shaft temperature changes.

The one hour period allows rod temperature to stabilize following rod movement in order to ensure the indicated position is accurate.

Since the shutdown banks are positioned manually by the control room operator, a verification of shutdown bank position at a Frequency of 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />, after the reactor is taken critical, is adequate to ensure that they are within their insertion limits. Also, the 12-hour Frequency takes into account other information available in the control room for the purpose of monitoring the status of shutdown rods.

REFERENCES 1. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50, Appendix A, General Design Criterion 10, "Reactor Design," General Design Criterion 26, "Reactivity Control System Redundancy and Capability," and General Design Criterion 28, "Reactivity Limits."

2. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50.46, "Acceptance Criteria for Emergency Core Cooling Systems for Light Water Nuclear Power Reactors."
3. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.0, "Accident Analyses."

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-39

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 B 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS B 3.1.7 Control Bank Insertion Limits BASES BACKGROUND The insertion limits of the shutdown and control rods are initial assumptions in all safety analyses that assume rod insertion upon reactor trip. The insertion limits directly affect core power and fuel burnup distributions and assumptions of available ejected rod worth, SDM, and initial reactivity insertion rate.

The applicable criteria for these reactivity and power distribution design requirements are 10 CFR 50, Appendix A, GDC 10, "Reactor Design,"

GDC 26, "Reactivity Control System Redundancy and Capability," and GDC 28, "Reactivity Limits" (Ref. 1), and 10 CFR 50.46, "Acceptance Criteria for Emergency Core Cooling Systems for Light Water Nuclear Power Reactors" (Ref. 2). Limits on control rod insertion have been established, and all rod positions are monitored and controlled during power operation to ensure that the power distribution and reactivity limits defined by the design power peaking and SDM limits are preserved.

The rod cluster control assemblies (RCCAs) are divided among control banks and shutdown banks. Each bank may be further subdivided into two groups to provide for precise reactivity control (Shutdown Banks C and D have only one group each). A group consists of two or more RCCAs that are electrically paralleled to step simultaneously. Except for Shutdown Banks C and D, a bank of RCCAs consists of two groups that are moved in a staggered fashion, but always within one step of each other. There are four control banks and four shutdown banks. See LCO 3.1.5, "Rod Group Alignment Limits," for control and shutdown rod OPERABILITY and alignment requirements, and LCO 3.1.8, "Rod Position Indication," for position indication requirements.

The control bank insertion limits are specified in the COLR. An example is provided for information only in Figure B 3.1.7-1. The control banks are required to be at or above the insertion limit lines.

Figure B 3.1.7-1 also indicates how the control banks are moved in an overlap pattern. Overlap is the distance traveled together by two control banks. The predetermined position of control bank C, at which control bank D will begin to move with bank C on a withdrawal, as an example may be at 128 steps. Therefore, in this example, control bank C overlaps control bank D from 128 steps to the fully withdrawn position for control bank C. The fully withdrawn position and predetermined overlap positions are defined in the COLR.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-40

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES (continued)

BACKGROUND The control banks are used for precise reactivity control of the reactor.

(continued) The positions of the control banks are normally controlled automatically by the Rod Control System, but can also be manually controlled. They are capable of adding reactivity very quickly (compared to borating or diluting).

The power density at any point in the core must be limited, so that the fuel design criteria are maintained. Together, LCO 3.1.5, Rod Group Alignment Limits, LCO 3.1.6, "Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits,"

LCO 3.1.7, Control Bank Insertion Limits, LCO 3.2.3, "AXIAL FLUX DIFFERENCE (AFD)," and LCO 3.2.4, "QUADRANT POWER TILT RATIO (QPTR)," provide limits on control component operation and on monitored process variables, which ensure that the core operates within the fuel design criteria.

The shutdown and control bank insertion and alignment limits, AFD, and QPTR are process variables that together characterize and control the three dimensional power distribution of the reactor core. Additionally, the control bank insertion limits control the reactivity that could be added in the event of a rod ejection accident, and the shutdown and control bank insertion limits ensure the required SDM is maintained.

Operation within the subject LCO limits will prevent fuel cladding failures that would breach the primary fission product barrier and release fission products to the reactor coolant in the event of a loss of coolant accident (LOCA), loss of flow, ejected rod, or other accident requiring termination by a Reactor Trip System (RTS) trip function.

APPLICABLE The shutdown and control bank insertion limits, AFD, and QPTR LCOs SAFETY are required to prevent power distributions that could result in fuel ANALYSES cladding failures in the event of a LOCA, loss of flow, ejected rod, or other accident requiring termination by an RTS trip function.

The acceptance criteria for addressing shutdown and control bank insertion limits and inoperability or misalignment are that:

a. There be no violations of:
1. Specified acceptable fuel design limits, or
2. Reactor Coolant System pressure boundary integrity; and
b. The core remains subcritical after accident transients other than a main steam line break (MSLB).

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-41

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES (continued)

As such, the shutdown and control bank insertion limits affect safety analysis involving core reactivity and power distributions (Ref. 3 through 13).

The SDM requirement is ensured by limiting the control and shutdown bank insertion limits so that allowable inserted worth of the RCCAs is such that sufficient reactivity is available in the rods to shut down the reactor to hot zero power with a reactivity margin that assumes the maximum worth RCCA remains fully withdrawn upon trip (Ref. 5, 6, 8 and 11).

Operation at the insertion limits or AFD limits may approach the maximum allowable linear heat generation rate or peaking factor with the allowed QPTR present. Operation at the insertion limit may also indicate the maximum ejected RCCA worth could be equal to the limiting value in fuel cycles that have sufficiently high ejected RCCA worths.

The control and shutdown bank insertion limits ensure that safety analyses assumptions for SDM, ejected rod worth, and power distribution peaking factors are preserved (Ref. 3 through 13).

The insertion limits satisfy Criterion 2 of 10CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii), in that they are initial conditions assumed in the safety analysis.

LCO The limits on control banks sequence, overlap, and physical insertion, as defined in the COLR, must be maintained because they serve the function of preserving power distribution, ensuring that the SDM is maintained, ensuring that ejected rod worth is maintained, and ensuring adequate negative reactivity insertion is available on trip. The overlap between control banks provides more uniform rates of reactivity insertion and withdrawal and is imposed to maintain acceptable power peaking during control bank motion.

The LCO is modified by a Note indicating the LCO requirement is not applicable to control banks being inserted while performing SR 3.1.5.2.

This SR verifies the freedom of the rods to move, and may require the control bank to move below the LCO limits, which would normally violate the LCO. This Note applies to each control bank as it is moved below the insertion limit to perform the SR. This Note is not applicable should a malfunction stop performance of the SR.

APPLICABILITY The control bank sequence, overlap, and physical insertion limits shall be maintained with the reactor in MODES 1 and 2 with keff 1.0. These limits must be maintained, since they preserve the assumed power distribution, ejected rod worth, SDM, and reactivity rate insertion assumptions. Applicability in MODES 3, 4, and 5 is not required, since neither the power distribution nor ejected rod worth assumptions would be exceeded in these MODES.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-42

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES (continued)

ACTIONS A.1, A.2.1, A.2.2, and A.3 If Control Bank A, B, or C is inserted less than or equal to 10 steps below the insertion, sequence, or overlap limits, 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> is allowed to restore the control bank to within the limits. Verification of SDM or initiation of boration within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> is required, since the SDM in MODES 1 and 2 is ensured by adhering to the control and shutdown bank insertion limits (see LCO 3.1.1). If a control bank is not within its insertion limit, SDM will be verified by performing a reactivity balance calculation, considering the effects listed in the BASES for SR 3.1.1.1.

While the control bank is outside the insertion, sequence, or overlap limits, all shutdown banks must be within their insertion limits to ensure sufficient shutdown margin is available and that power distribution is controlled. The 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> Completion Time is sufficient to repair most rod control failures that would prevent movement of a shutdown bank.

Condition A is limited to Control Banks A, B, or C. The allowance is not required for Control Bank D because the full power bank insertion limit can be met during performance of the SR 3.1.5.2 control rod freedom of movement (trippability) testing.

B.1.1, B.1.2, B.2, C.1.1, C.1.2, and C.2 When the control banks are outside the acceptable insertion limits for reasons other than Condition A, they must be restored to within those limits. This restoration can occur in two ways:

a. Reducing power to be consistent with rod position; or
b. Moving rods to be consistent with power.

Also, verification of SDM or initiation of boration to regain SDM is required within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />, since the SDM in MODES 1 and 2 normally ensured by adhering to the control and shutdown bank insertion limits (see LCO 3.1.1, "SHUTDOWN MARGIN (SDM) - Tavg > 200°F") has been upset. If control banks are not within their insertion limits, then SDM will be verified by performing a reactivity balance calculation, considering the effects listed in the Bases for SR 3.1.1.1.

Similarly, if the control banks are found to be out of sequence or in the wrong overlap configuration for reasons other than Condition A, they must be restored to meet the limits.

Operation beyond the LCO limits is allowed for a short time period in order to take conservative action because the simultaneous occurrence of either a LOCA, loss of flow accident, ejected rod accident, or other accident during this short time period, together with an inadequate power (continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-43

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES (continued)

ACTIONS distribution or reactivity capability, has an acceptably low probability.

(continued)

The allowed Completion Time of 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> for restoring the banks to within the insertion, sequence, and overlap limits provides an acceptable time for evaluating and repairing minor problems without allowing the plant to remain in an unacceptable condition for an extended period of time.

D.1 If the Required Actions cannot be completed within the associated Completion Times, the plant must be brought to MODE 2 with keff < 1.0, where the LCO is not applicable. The allowed Completion Time of 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching the required MODE from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-44

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES (continued)

SURVEILLANCE SR 3.1.7.1 REQUIREMENTS This Surveillance is required to ensure that the reactor does not achieve criticality with the control banks below their insertion limits.

The estimated critical position (ECP) depends upon a number of factors, one of which is xenon concentration. If the ECP was calculated long before criticality, xenon concentration could change to make the ECP substantially in error. Conversely, determining the ECP immediately before criticality could be an unnecessary burden. There are a number of unit parameters requiring operator attention at that point. Performing the ECP calculation within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> prior to criticality avoids a large error from changes in xenon concentration, but allows the operator some flexibility to schedule the ECP calculation with other startup activities.

SR 3.1.7.2 With an OPERABLE bank insertion limit monitor, verification of the control bank insertion limits at a Frequency of 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> is sufficient to ensure OPERABILITY of the bank insertion limit monitor and to detect control banks that may be approaching the insertion limits since, normally, very little rod motion occurs in 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />. If the insertion limit monitor becomes inoperable, verification of the control bank position at a Frequency of 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> is sufficient to detect control banks that may be approaching the insertion limits.

The Surveillance is modified by a Note stating that the SR is not required to be performed for control banks until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after motion of rods in those banks. Control rod temperature affects the accuracy of the rod position indication system. Due to changes in the magnetic permeability of the drive shaft as a function of temperature, the indicated position is expected to change with time as the drive shaft temperature changes. The one hour period allows control rod temperature to stabilize following rod movement in order to ensure the indicated rod position is accurate.

SR 3.1.7.3 When control banks are maintained within their insertion limits as checked by SR 3.1.7.2 above, it is unlikely that their sequence and overlap will not be in accordance with requirements provided in the COLR.

The Surveillance is modified by a Note stating that the SR is not required to be performed for control banks until 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> after motion of rods in those banks. Control rod temperature affects the accuracy of the rod position indication system. Due to changes in the magnetic permeability of the drive shaft as a function of temperature, the indicated position is expected to change with time as the drive shaft temperature changes. The one hour period allows control rod temperature to stabilize (continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-45

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES (continued)

SURVEILLANCE SR 3.1.7.3 (continued0 REQUIREMENTS (continued) following rod movement in order to ensure the indicated rod position is accurate.

A Frequency of 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> is consistent with the insertion limit check above in SR 3.1.7.2.

REFERENCES 1. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50, Appendix A, General Design Criterion 10, "Reactor Design," General Design Criterion 26, "Reactivity Control System Redundancy and Capability," and General Design Criterion 28, "Reactivity Limits."

2. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50.46, "Acceptance Criteria for Emergency Core Cooling Systems for Light Water Nuclear Power Reactors."
3. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.1, "Uncontrolled Rod Cluster Control Assembly Bank Withdrawal From a Subcritical Condition."
4. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.2, "Uncontrolled Rod Cluster Control Assembly Bank Withdrawal At Power."
5. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.3, "Rod Cluster Control Assembly Misalignment."
6. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.4, "Uncontrolled Boron Dilution."
7. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.5, "Partial Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow."
8. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.13, "Accidental Depressurization of the Main Steam System."
9. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.3.4, "Complete Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow."
10. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.3.6, "Single Rod Cluster Control Assembly Withdrawal At Full Power."
11. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.2.1, "Major Rupture of Main Steam Line."
12. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.4, "Single Reactor Coolant Pump Locked Rotor."
13. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.6, "Rupture of a Control Rod Drive Mechanism Housing (Rod Cluster Control Assembly Ejection)."

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-46

Control Bank Insertion Limits B 3.1.7 BASES (continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-47

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 B 3.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS B 3.1.8 Rod Position Indication BASES BACKGROUND According to GDC 13 (Ref. 1), instrumentation to monitor variables and systems over their operating ranges during normal operation, anticipated operational occurrences, and accident conditions must be OPERABLE.

LCO 3.1.8 is required to ensure OPERABILITY of the control rod position indicators to determine control rod positions and thereby ensure compliance with the control rod alignment and insertion limits.

The OPERABILITY, including position indication, of the shutdown and control rods is an initial assumption in all safety analyses that assume rod insertion upon reactor trip. Maximum rod misalignment is an initial assumption in the safety analysis that directly affects core power distributions and assumptions of available SDM. Rod position indication is required to assess OPERABILITY and misalignment.

Mechanical or electrical failures may cause a control rod to become inoperable or to become misaligned from its group. Control rod inoperability or misalignment may cause increased power peaking, due to the asymmetric reactivity distribution and a reduction in the total available rod worth for reactor shutdown. Therefore, control rod alignment and OPERABILITY are related to core operation in design power peaking limits and the core design requirement of a minimum SDM.

Limits on control rod alignment and OPERABILITY have been established, and all rod positions are monitored and controlled during power operation to ensure that the power distribution and reactivity limits defined by the design power peaking and SDM limits are preserved.

Rod cluster control assemblies (RCCAs), or rods, are moved out of the core (up or withdrawn) or into the core (down or inserted) by their control rod drive mechanisms. The RCCAs are divided among control banks and shutdown banks. Each bank may be further subdivided into two groups to provide for precise reactivity control (Shutdown Banks C and D have only one group each).

The axial position of shutdown rods and control rods are determined by two separate and independent systems: the Bank Demand Position Indication System (commonly called group step counters) and the analog Rod Position Indication (RPI) System.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-48

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES BACKGROUND The Bank Demand Position Indication System counts the pulses from the (continued) Rod Control System that move the rods. There is one step counter for each group of rods. Individual rods in a group all receive the same signal to move and should, therefore, all be at the same position indicated by the group step counter for that group. The Bank Demand Position Indication System is considered highly precise (+/- 1 step or +/- 5/8 inch). If a rod does not move one step for each demand pulse, the step counter will still count the pulse and incorrectly reflect the position of the rod.

The RPI System provides an accurate indication of actual control rod position, but at a lower precision than the step counters. This system is based on inductive analog signals from a series of coils spaced along a hollow tube with a center-to-center distance of 3.75 inches, which is 6 steps. The normal indication accuracy of the RPI System is +/- 6 steps

(+/- 3.75 inches), and the maximum uncertainty is +/- 12 steps

(+/- 7.5 inches). With an indicated deviation of 12 steps between the group step counter and RPI, the maximum deviation between actual rod position and the demand position could be 24 steps, or 15 inches.

The Power Distribution Monitoring System (PDMS) as controlled by Technical Requirements Manual Section 3.3.9 develops a detailed three dimensional power distribution via its nodal code coupled with updates from plant instrumentation, including the fixed incore detectors. The monitored power distribution is compared to the reference power distribution corresponding to all control rods properly aligned. Agreement between the two power distributions can be used to indirectly verify the control rod is aligned.

APPLICABLE Control and shutdown rod position accuracy is essential during power SAFETY operation. Power peaking, ejected rod worth, or SDM limits may be ANALYSES violated in the event of a Design Basis Accident (Ref. 2 through 12), with control or shutdown rods operating outside their limits undetected.

Therefore, the acceptance criteria for rod position indication is that rod positions must be known with sufficient accuracy in order to verify the core is operating within the group sequence, overlap, design peaking limits, ejected rod worth, and with minimum SDM (LCO 3.1.6, "Shutdown Bank Insertion Limits," and LCO 3.1.7, "Control Bank Insertion Limits").

The rod positions must also be known in order to verify the alignment limits are preserved (LCO 3.1.5, "Rod Group Alignment Limits"). Control rod positions are continuously monitored to provide operators with information that ensures the plant is operating within the bounds of the accident analysis assumptions.

(continued)

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-49

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES APPLICABLE The control rod position indicator channels satisfy Criterion 2 of 10 CFR SAFETY 50.36(c)(2)(ii). The control rod position indicators monitor control rod ANALYSES position, which is an initial condition of the accident.

(continued)

LCO LCO 3.1.8 specifies that the RPI System and the Bank Demand Position Indication System be OPERABLE for all control rods. For the control rod position indicators to be OPERABLE requires meeting the SR of the LCO (when required) and the following:

a. The RPI System indicates within 12 steps of the group step counter demand position as required by LCO 3.1.5, "Rod Group Alignment Limits;"
b. For the RPI System there are no failed coils; and
c. The Bank Demand Indication System has been calibrated either in the fully inserted position or to the RPI System.

The SR of the LCO is modified by a Note which states it is not required to be met for RPIs associated with rods that do not meet LCO 3.1.5. If a rod is known to not be within 12 steps of the group demand position, the Actions of LCO 3.1.5 provide appropriate Actions. Otherwise, the 12 step agreement limit between the Bank Demand Position Indication System and the RPI System indicates that the Bank Demand Position Indication System is adequately calibrated, and can be used for indication of the measurement of control rod bank position.

A deviation of less than the allowable limit, given in LCO 3.1.5, in position indication for a single control rod, ensures high confidence that the position uncertainty of the corresponding control rod group is within the assumed values used in the analysis (that specified control rod group insertion limits).

These requirements ensure that control rod position indication during power operation and PHYSICS TESTS is accurate, and that design assumptions are not challenged. OPERABILITY of the position indicator channels ensures that inoperable, misaligned, or mispositioned control rods can be detected. Therefore, power peaking, ejected rod worth, and SDM can be controlled within acceptable limits.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-50 (continued)

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES LCO (continued) The LCO is modified by a Note stating that the RPI system is not required to be OPERABLE for 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> following movement of the associated rods.

Control and shutdown rod temperature affects the accuracy of the RPI System. Due to changes in the magnetic permeability of the drive shaft as a function of temperature, the indicated position is expected to change with time as the drive shaft temperature changes. The one hour period allows temperature to stabilize following rod movement in order to ensure the indicated positon is accurate.

APPLICABILITY The requirements on the RPI and step counters are only applicable in MODES 1 and 2 (consistent with LCO 3.1.5, LCO 3.1.6, and LCO 3.1.7),

because these are the only MODES in which power is generated, and the OPERABILITY and alignment of rods have the potential to affect the safety of the plant. In the shutdown MODES, the OPERABILITY of the shutdown and control banks has the potential to affect the required SDM, but this effect can be compensated for by an increase in the boron concentration of the Reactor Coolant System.

ACTIONS The ACTIONS table is modified by a Note indicating that a separate Condition entry is allowed for each inoperable rod position indicator and each demand position indicator. This is acceptable because the Required Actions for each Condition provide appropriate compensatory actions for each inoperable position indicator.

A.1, A.2.1, and A.2.2 When one RPI channel per group in one or more group fails, the position of the rod can still be determined indirectly by use of incore power distribution measurement information. Incore power distribution measurement information is obtained from an OPERABLE Power Distribution Monitoring System (PDMS) (Ref. 15). The Required Action may also be satisfied by ensuring at least once per 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> that FQ satisfies LCO 3.2.1, FNH satisfies LCO 3.2.2, and SHUTDOWN MARGIN is within the limits provided in the COLR, provided the non-indicating rods have not been moved. Based on experience, normal power operation does not require excessive movement of banks. If a bank has been significantly moved, the Required Action of C.1 or C.2 below is required.

Therefore, verification of rod position within the Completion Time of 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> is adequate for allowing continued full power operation, since the probability of simultaneously having a rod significantly out of position and an event sensitive to that rod position is small.

Required Action A.1 requires verification of a rod with an inoperable RPI once per 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br />. Required Action A.2.1 provides an alternative.

Required Action A.2.1 requires verification of rod position using power distribution measurement information every 31 EFPD, which coincides with the normal measurements to verify core power distribution.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-51 (continued)

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES ACTIONS A.1, A.2.1, and A.2.2 (continued)

(continued)

Required Action A.2.1 includes six distinct requirements for verification of the position of rods associated with an inoperable RPI using incore power distribution measurement information:

a. Initial verification within 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> of the inoperability of the RPI;
b. Re-verification once every 31 Effective Full Power Days (EFPD) thereafter;
c. Verification within 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> if rod control system parameters indicate unintended rod movement. An unintended rod movement is defined as the release of the rods stationary gripper when no action was demanded either manually or automatically from the rod control system, or a rod motion in a direction other than the direction demanded by the rod control system. Verifying that no unintended rod movement has occurred is performed by monitoring the rod control system stationary gripper coil current for indications of rod movement;
d. Verification within 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> if the rod with an inoperable RPI is intentionally moved greater than 12 steps;
e. Verification prior to exceeding 50% RTP if power is reduced below 50% RTP; and
f. Verification within 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> of reaching 100% RTP if power is reduced to less than 100% power RTP.

Should the rod with the inoperable RPI be moved more than 12 steps, or if reactor power is changed, the position of the rod with the inoperable RPI must be verified.

Required Action A.2.2 states that the inoperable RPI must be restored to OPERABLE status prior to entering MODE 2 from MODE 3. The repair of the inoperable RPI must be performed prior to returning to power operation following a shutdown.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-52 (continued)

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES ACTIONS A.3 (continued)

Reduction of THERMAL POWER to 50% RTP puts core into a condition where rod position is not significantly affecting core peaking factors (Ref. 4). The allowed Completion Time of 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reducing power to 50% RTP from full power conditions without challenging plant systems and allowing for rod position determination by Required Action A.1 above.

B.1 and B.2 When more than one RPI per group in one or more groups fail, additional actions are necessary. Placing the Rod Control System in manual assures unplanned rod motion will not occur. The immediate Completion Time for placing the Rod Control System in manual reflects the urgency with which unplanned rod motion must be prevented while in this Condition.

The inoperable RPIs must be restored, such that a maximum of one RPI per group is inoperable, within 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />. The 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> Completion Time provides sufficient time to troubleshoot and restore the RPI system to operation while avoiding the plant challenges associated with the shutdown without full rod position indication.

Based on operating experience, normal power operation does not require excessive rod movement. If one or more rods has been significantly moved, the Required Action of C.1 or C.2 below is required.

C.1 and C.2 With one or more RPI inoperable in one or more groups and the affected groups have moved greater than 24 steps in one direction since the last determination of rod position, additional actions are needed to verify the position of rods with inoperable RPI. Within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />, the position of the rods with inoperable position indication must be determined using the PDMS to verify these rods are still properly positioned, relative to their group positions.

If, within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />, the rod positions have not been verified, THERMAL POWER must be reduced to 50% RTP within 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> to avoid undesirable power distributions that could result from continued operation at 50% RTP, if one or more rods are misaligned by more than 24 steps.

The allowed Completion Time of 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> provides an acceptable period of time to verify the rod positions.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-53 (continued)

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES ACTIONS D.1.1 and D.1.2 (continued)

With one or more demand position indicators per bank inoperable in one or more banks, the rod positions can be determined by the RPI System.

Since normal power operation does not require excessive movement of rods, verification by administrative means that the rod position indicators are OPERABLE and the most withdrawn rod and the least withdrawn rod are 12 steps apart within the allowed Completion Time of once every 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> is adequate.

D.2 Reduction of THERMAL POWER to 50% RTP puts the core into a condition where rod position is not significantly affecting core peaking factor limits (Ref. 13). The allowed Completion Time of 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> provides an acceptable period of time to verify the rod positions per Required Actions D.1.1 and D.1.2 or reduce power to 50% RTP.

E.1 If the Required Actions cannot be completed within the associated Completion Time, the plant must be brought to a MODE in which the requirement does not apply. To achieve this status, the plant must be brought to at least MODE 3 within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />. The allowed Completion Time is reasonable, based on operating experience, for reaching the required MODE from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-54 (continued)

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES SURVEILLANCE SR 3.1.8.1 REQUIREMENTS Verification that the RPI agrees with the demand position within 12 steps ensures that the RPI is operating correctly.

This Surveillance is performed prior to reactor criticality after each removal of the reactor head, as there is the potential for unnecessary plant transients if the SR were performed with the reactor at power.

The Surveillance is modified by a Note which states it is not required to be met for RPIs associated with rods that do not meet LCO 3.1.5. If a rod is known to not be within 12 steps of the group demand position, the ACTIONS of LCO 3.1.5 provide the appropriate Actions.

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-55 (continued)

Rod Position Indication B 3.1.8 BASES (continued)

REFERENCES 1. Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50, Appendix A, General Design Criterion 13, "Instrumentation and Control."

2. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.1, "Uncontrolled Rod Cluster Control Assembly Bank Withdrawal From a Subcritical Condition."
3. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.2, "Uncontrolled Rod Cluster Control Assembly Bank Withdrawal At Power."
4. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.3, "Rod Cluster Control Assembly Misalignment."
5. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.4, "Uncontrolled Boron Dilution."
6. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.5, "Partial Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow."
7. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.2.13, "Accidental Depressurization of the Main Steam System."
8. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.3.4, "Complete Loss of Forced Reactor Coolant Flow."
9. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.3.6, "Single Rod Cluster Control Assembly Withdrawal At Full Power."
10. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.2.1, "Major Rupture of Main Steam Line."
11. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.4, "Single Reactor Coolant Pump Locked Rotor."
12. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 15.4.6, "Rupture of a Control Rod Drive Mechanism Housing (Rod Cluster Control Assembly Ejection)."
13. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 4.3, "Nuclear Design."
14. Watts Bar FSAR, Section 7.7.1.3.2, Main Control Room Rod Position Indication.
15. WCAP-12472-P-A, BEACON' Core Monitoring and Operations Support System, August 1994 (Addendum 2, April 2002).

Watts Bar - Unit 2 B 3.1-56 (continued)